Garmin | G1000 NXi: Piper PA-28-181 Archer | Garmin G1000 NXi: Piper PA-28-181 Archer Pilot's Guide, Piper PA-28-181 Archer

Garmin G1000 NXi: Piper PA-28-181 Archer Pilot's Guide, Piper PA-28-181 Archer
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
www.garmin.com
Piper PA-28-181
Archer
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG)
Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical
Support: 888.606.5482
190-02130-00
Revision A
Piper PA-28-181 Archer
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2016 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 2698.00 or later for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer. Some differences in
operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG) Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical Support: 888.606.5482
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G1000® , FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin SVT™,
SurfaceWatch™, and Connext™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without
the express permission of Garmin.
AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc. Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker Flugfunkwerk GmbH. NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
October 2016
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only
an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied
upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational use of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
iv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: When using the autopilot to fly an approach with vertical guidance, the autopilot will not level
the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may
appear as a partial symbol.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and
heading indications in the following geographic areas: North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South
of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada);
North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or
modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
v
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
vi
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: Operate G1000 system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
NOTE: The system supports approval of AC 120-76C Hardware Class 3, Software Type B Electronic Flight Bag
(EFB) electronic aeronautical chart applications. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary
source (traditional paper or additional electronic display) necessary onboard the aircraft. If the secondary
source is a Portable Electronic Device (PED), its use must be consistent with guidance in AC 120-76C.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
vii
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-02130-00
viii
Revision
A
B
C
Date
10/11/16
10/12/16
10/31/16
Page Range
Description
i – I-6
Initial Release for GDU 20.02
i – I-6
Updated to fix clerical errors
i – I-6
Updated to fix clerical errors
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................... 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).................................... 2
System Controls......................................................... 4
PFD Controls................................................................. 4
Secure Digital Cards.................................................. 6
System Power-up........................................................ 7
System Operation...................................................... 8
Normal Operation.......................................................... 8
Reversionary Mode........................................................ 8
ADAHRS Operation........................................................ 9
System Annunciations.................................................. 11
Softkey Function.......................................................... 11
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 18
Accessing System Functionality............................. 23
Menus........................................................................ 23
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 24
MFD System Pages...................................................... 28
Display Backlighting................................................ 42
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Instruments.................................................... 46
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 46
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 48
Altimeter.................................................................... 49
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 52
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 52
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 54
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 58
Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 65
Temperature Displays................................................... 65
Wind Data.................................................................. 66
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 67
PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 68
System Annunciations.................................................. 68
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 69
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 69
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 70
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 70
Abnormal Operations.............................................. 72
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 72
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 73
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 Engine Display.......................................................... 76
Engine Page................................................................ 78
Oil Pressure and Temperature Gauges............................ 82
Fuel Quantity.............................................................. 82
EIS Display (Reversionary Mode)................................... 83
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................... 85
PFD Controls and Frequency Display.............................. 86
GMA 1347 Audio Panel Controls................................... 88
COM Operation........................................................ 90
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation...................... 90
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................... 91
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz..................... 92
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................... 93
Auto-tuning from the MFD........................................... 94
Frequency Spacing....................................................... 97
Automatic Squelch....................................................... 98
Volume....................................................................... 98
NAV Operation......................................................... 99
NAV Radio Selection and Activation.............................. 99
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 100
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 102
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 106
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 107
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 108
GTX 345 Mode S Transponder.............................. 112
Transponder Controls................................................. 112
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 113
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 115
IDENT Function......................................................... 116
Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 117
Power-Up.................................................................. 117
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 117
Speaker.................................................................... 117
Intercom................................................................... 117
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 120
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 120
Split COM Operation.................................................. 121
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 122
Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......................... 123
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 124
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 124
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 124
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 124
PFD Failure, Dual System............................................ 124
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
x
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction............................................................ 127
Navigation Status Box................................................ 128
Using Map Displays............................................... 130
Map Orientation........................................................ 130
Map Range............................................................... 132
Map Panning............................................................. 134
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 138
Topography............................................................... 139
Map Symbols............................................................ 142
Airways.................................................................... 148
Track Vector.............................................................. 150
Wind Vector.............................................................. 151
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 152
Field of View (SVt)..................................................... 153
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 154
Waypoints............................................................... 155
Airports.................................................................... 157
Intersections............................................................. 163
NDBs........................................................................ 165
VORs........................................................................ 167
VRPs........................................................................ 169
User Waypoints......................................................... 171
Airspaces................................................................. 177
Direct-to-Navigation ............................................ 181
Flight Planning....................................................... 187
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 188
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 197
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 199
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 201
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 208
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 210
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 214
Parallel Track............................................................. 215
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 218
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 219
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 220
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 222
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 222
5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 228
Altitude Constraints................................................... 230
5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 234
Departures................................................................ 235
Arrivals .................................................................... 238
Approaches .............................................................. 240
5.9 Trip Planning........................................................... 249
Trip Planning............................................................. 249
Weight Planning........................................................ 253
Weight Caution And Warning Conditions..................... 255
5.10 RAIM Prediction..................................................... 256
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan........................................ 259
5.12 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 286
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather................................................... 290
Activating Services..................................................... 290
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 292
FIS-B Weather......................................................... 328
Using FIS-B Weather Products..................................... 328
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 352
Terrain Proximity.................................................... 353
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 353
Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Terrain.............. 358
VSD Display.............................................................. 358
Track Mode Boundary................................................ 360
Terrain-SVT.............................................................. 362
Displaying Terrain-SVT Data........................................ 363
Terrain-SVT Page....................................................... 366
Terrain-SVT Alerts...................................................... 367
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance............................. 368
System Status............................................................ 370
TAWS-B.................................................................... 371
Relative Terrain Symbology......................................... 372
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 376
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 377
System Status............................................................ 382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.7 Traffic Information Service (TIS)........................... 384
Displaying TRAFFIC Data............................................ 385
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 387
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 388
System Status............................................................ 389
6.8 GTS 800 Traffic........................................................ 392
Theory of operation................................................... 392
TAS Alerts................................................................. 396
System Test............................................................... 397
Operation................................................................. 398
6.9 ADS-B Traffic........................................................... 405
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 405
ADS-B with TAS......................................................... 406
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting.................... 407
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 409
Traffic Description...................................................... 410
Operation................................................................. 410
ADS-B System Status................................................. 416
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Automatic Flight Control System................................... 419
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)....................... 422
SVT Operation........................................................... 423
SVT Features............................................................. 425
Field of View............................................................. 434
SafeTaxi................................................................... 436
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 439
FliteCharts............................................................... 442
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 443
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 444
Chart Options............................................................ 447
Day/Night View......................................................... 447
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 448
Airport Directory.................................................... 451
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.451
WIFI Connections................................................... 454
SiriusXM Radio Entertainment............................. 457
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 457
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 458
190-02130-00 Rev. C
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
Scheduler................................................................ 462
Flight Data Logging............................................... 464
Connext Setup........................................................ 466
Abnormal Operation.............................................. 468
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 468
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 468
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 468
GDL 59/69/69A SXM Troubleshooting.......................... 469
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 471
CAS Message Prioritization......................................... 473
CAS Annunciations.................................................... 475
System Annunciations................................................ 476
System Message Advisories........................................ 478
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 489
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 490
ADS-B Status Page Messages...................................... 491
Terrain-SVT Alerts And Annunciations.......................... 492
TAWS-B Alerts And Annunciations............................... 493
TIS Annunciations...................................................... 495
TAS Annunciations..................................................... 496
ADS-B Alerts and Annunciations.................................. 497
GDL 69/69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages............ 498
Database Management................................................... 499
Loading Updated Databases....................................... 499
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 508
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................... 509
Frequently Asked Questions........................................... 519
General TIS Information.................................................. 523
Map Symbols.................................................................... 525
INDEX
Index ................................................................................... I-1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
xii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G1000 Integrated Avionics System as installed in the Piper PA28-181 Archer. The system is an integrated system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays.
EIS
The optional Flight Stream 510 device provides a Bluetooth® connection between the system and a mobile
device. GPS, ADAHRS, ADS-B, traffic, Sirius XM audio, and FIS-B weather data can then be shared with the
mobile device, and flight plans can be transferred to or from the mobile device. Also, database updates may also
be performed using the Flight Stream 510 WiFi link.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GDU 1050 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GDU 1050 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GSU 75 Air Data, Attitude and Heading
Reference System (ADAHRS)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit
• GMA 1347 Dual Audio System with Integrated
Marker Beacon Receiver
• GTX 335R/345R Extended Squitter Mode S
Transponder
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are also shown in Figure 1-1.
The G1000 is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
• GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
• KN 63 DME
• KR 87 ADF or ADF 3504
• GDL 59 WiFi Data Link
• S-TEC 55X Autopilot
AFCS
• GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
EIS
• GIA 63W (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD and MFD. Each
GIA 63W contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system
integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the PFD and MFD via HSDB connection. The GIA
63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1050 (2) – The GDUs are configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a Multi Function Display
(MFD). Both feature 10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays communicate with
each other through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired with an
Ethernet connection to an IAU.
• GSU 75 (1) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe to provide pressure altitude,
airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the system. This unit also provides aircraft attitude and
heading information via ARINC 429 to the PFD, MFD, and GIA 63W. The GSU 75B contains advanced
sensors (including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field
information, and with the GIA 63W to obtain GPS information. ADAHRS modes of operation are discussed
later in this document.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GTP 59 (1) – Provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the GSU 75B.
• GEA 71 (2) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GMU 44 (1) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GSU 75B for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GSU 75B and communicates with the GSU 75B,
using an RS-485 digital interface.
AFCS
• GMA 1347 (1) – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio,
intercom, and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual
control of display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP Button; see Section 1.5, System Operation) and
communicates with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GTX 335R/345R (1) – Solid-state transponders that provide Modes A, C, S and ADS-B capability. The optional
GTX 345R also provides ADS-B In/Out. The transponder can be controlled from the PFD. The transponder
communicates with the both GIA 63Ws through an RS-232 digital interface.
• GDL 69A SXM (1) (Optional) – A satellite radio receiver that provides data link weather information to the
MFD (and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69A
SXM communicates with the MFD via HSDB connection. Subscriptions to the SiriusXM Weather or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio services are required to enable the GDL 69A SXM capability.
APPENDICES
• GDL 59 (1) (Optional) – GDL 59 operation is performed with the PFD through HSDB.
INDEX
• GTS 800 (Optional) – The GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) uses active interrogations of Mode S and
Mode C transponders to provide traffic information to the pilot independent of the air traffic control system.
2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
#2
GDU 1050
(MFD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDL 69A SXM
(XM Weather/
Audio Datalink)
GTS 800
(TAS)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
#1
GDU 1050
(PFD)
GDL 59
(Data Link)
GMA 1347
(Audio
Panel)
EIS
#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
GMA 44
(Magnetometer)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
GSU 75
(ADAHRS)
GPS/SBAS
G/S
Flight
Director
GTX 335R
(Transponder)
GPS/SBAS
GEA 71 (Engine &
Airframe I/F)
G/S
VOR/LOC
Flight
Director
AFCS Mode
Logic
STEC 55X
(AFCS)
Servo Logic
AFCS
AFCS Mode
Logic
VHF COM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR/LOC
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GTX 345R
Or
VHF COM
Servo Logic
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
KN-63
(DME)
KR-87 or ADF 3504
(ADF)
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
APPENDICES
Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
Figure 1-1 System (LRU Configuration)
INDEX
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide.
This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 1347) is described in the CNS & Audio Panel section.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the PFD and
MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
PFD CONTROLS
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
APPENDICES
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
9
13
10
14
11
15
INDEX
12
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD/MFD bezels (see Figure 1-2).
4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
BARO Knob – Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
6
Dual COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to switch the tuning box (cyan box) between COM1 and COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this
key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON and OFF.
9
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
10
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
11
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
12
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor
ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects individual
characters for the highlighted cursor location.
13
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
14
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then be loaded into the active flight plan.
If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
15
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
APPENDICES
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the tuning box (cyan box) between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
EIS
The GDU 1050 data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage. Also, flight plans may be imported or exported
from an SD card in the MFD.
Install an SD card
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SD Card Slots
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
application and emergency power supply operation.
EIS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within one minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS/DG ALIGN: Remain Stationary’. The AHRS
should display valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align
itself both while taxiing in a straight line and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-5), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Airport Directory name and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Crew Profile
• Copyright
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and effective dates
AFCS
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted
to continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the Auxiliary (AUX) Weight
Planning Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Figure 1-5 MFD Power-up Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each GIA 63W is connected to the on-side display. This section discusses normal and reversionary
display operation, AHRS modes, GPS receiver operation, and System Annunciations.
NORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.8). In
EIS
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
AFCS
Figure 1-6 System Normal Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
REVERSIONARY MODE
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
INDEX
APPENDICES
In the event of a display failure, the system can be manually switched to reversionary (backup) mode (all
remaining displays enter reversionary mode). In reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented
on the remaining display(s) in the same format as in normal operating mode.
8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
Reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button.
Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed PFD)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode on All Displays
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-7 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
ADAHRS OPERATION
AFCS
In addition to using internal sensors, the GSU 75 ADAHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and
air data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the ADAHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the ADAHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Eight ADAHRS modes of operation are available (see Table 1-1)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by system messages.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific ADAHRS alert information.
APPENDICES
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while the ADAHRS is not operating normally can degrade ADAHRS accuracy.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
9
ADAHRS Mode
GPS Data
Available
Magnetometer
Data Available
Air Data
Available
Attitude Indicator
Condition
ADAHRS Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Valid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
ADAHRS no-GPS
No
Yes
Yes
Valid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ADAHRS no-GPS/
no-Mag
No
No
Yes
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading will coast-on-gyros until
it becomes invalid.
ADAHRS coast-ongyros until invalid
No
No
No
Invalid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
ADAHRS no-Mag
Data
Yes
No
Yes
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading Invalid.
ADAHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Data
Yes
No
No
Invalid Heading.
ADAHRS coaston-gyros until
invalid
No
Yes
No
Invalid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
ADAHRS no-Air
Data
Yes
Yes
No
Valid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
INDEX
Table 1-1 ADAHRS Operation
10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the POH for
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large amber or red “X” is typically displayed on windows associated
with the failed data (Figure 1-8 displays many possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon power-up, certain
windows remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All windows should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any window remains flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized
repair facility.
EIS
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GSU 75B ADAHRS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GSU75B ADAHRS
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
or
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics
Unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GTX 335/345
Transponder
or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
AFCS
GSU75B ADAHRS
Figure 1-8 System Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
APPENDICES
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey
level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to select the appropriate softkey.
There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey
label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by
the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed)
INDEX
Softkey On
Softkey Names (displayed)
Bezel-Mounted Softkeys (press)
Figure 1-9 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD SOFTKEYS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions, including
GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be
pressed to return to the previous level. If messages remain after acknowledgement, the Message Softkey
is black on white. The Message Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the
transponder (XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-10 PFD Map/HSI Softkeys
12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-11 PFD Opt Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-12 XPDR Softkeys
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Map/HSI
Layout
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Off
Inset Map
TFC Map
Wx LGND
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Detail
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Topo
Rel Ter
NEXRAD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR
Lightning
LTNG Off
AFCS
TFC Map
PFD Opt
SVT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways
Terrain
HDG LBL
APT Sign
APPENDICES
Wind
Description
Displays the PFD Map display settings softkeys.
Displays the PFD Map selection softkeys.
Removes the PFD map from display (Inset or Traffic)
Displays the Inset Map
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays/removes the name of the selected data link weather provider
(SiriusXM) and the weather product icon and age box (for enabled
weather products).
Selects desired amount of map detail:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
Detail 1: Declutters land data
Detail 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Detail 3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays traffic information on PFD Map.
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on PFD Map
Displays relative terrain information on the PFD Map
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on PFD Map (subscription
optional)
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional)
Adds/removes the display of SiriusXM lightning information on PFD Map.
Disables lightning function on PFD Map. The softkey annunciator is green
when the lightning function is off.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD options.
Displays additional SVT overlay softkeys
Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the
current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport
is within approximately 9 nm.
Displays the wind option softkeys
Headwind/Tailwind and crosswind components.
Wind direction arrow and speed.
Wind direction arrow with direction and speed.
Wind information not displayed.
INDEX
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Off
Level 4
14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
DME
Bearing 1
ALT Units
OBS
XPDR
On
ALT
0-7
Ident
Tmr/Ref
Nearest
APPENDICES
Ident
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
BKSP
Activates transponder (transponder replies to identification interrogations).
Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations).
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7.
Use numbers to enter code.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Removes numbers entered, one at a time.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Displays Timer/References Window.
Displays Nearest Airports Window.
AFCS
VFR
Code
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays the transponder selection softkeys.
Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder does not reply to any
interrogations).
Standby
Ident
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CDI
ADF/DME
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STD Baro
EIS
Meters
IN
HPA
Description
Displays DME Information Window
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency,
and Off.
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency, and
Off.
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals.
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are
selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with
active leg). When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator is green.
Cycles through FMS, NAV1, and NAV2 navigation modes on the CDI.
Displays/removes ADF/DME Radio Tuning Window (optional; may appear
as blank, ADF, DME, or ADF/DME depending on installation)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Bearing 2
Level 4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and
weather (optional). Most softkey sublevels have a Back Softkey which can be pressed to return to the previous
level.
INDEX
Figure 1-13 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
CO RST
Description
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; select again to
exit page (see the EIS Section for more information)
Resets displayed fuel remaining to filler tab level and fuel used to zero
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and
fuel used to zero
Resets the CO Guardian
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tabs
DEC Fuel
INC Fuel
RST Fuel
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
Engine
EIS
Map Opt
Off
VSD
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDICES
Detail
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM LTNG
METAR
Legend
AFCS
NEXRAD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AWY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TER
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map Page.
Displays inset window second level softkeys.
Removes VSD inset from Navigation Map Page.
Displays VSD profile information of terrain/obstacles along the current track,
vertical track vector, and selected altitude.
Auto: Automatically displays either VSD profile information for
active flight plan information or along current track with no
active flight plan.
FPL: Displays VSD profile information for active flight plan.
TRK: Displays VSD profile information along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No terrain information shown on MFD Map.
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers,
lakes) and elevation scale on MFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the MFD Map.
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No airways are displayed.
On: All airways are displayed.
LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed.
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Navigation Map Page
(optional).
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional).
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional).
Displays legends for the displayed XM Weather products (optional).
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through the following levels:
Detail All: All map features visible.
Detail-1: Declutters land data.
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic
Inset
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Charts
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Checklist
Level 2
Level 3
Description
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts.
Displays chart display settings softkeys.
CHRT Opt
Fit WDTH Changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Full SCN Removes data window to display chart on screen.
Displays the WPT–Airport Information page.
Show Map
Displays airport information:
Info
Info 1: Displays Airport Information Page
Info 2: Displays Airport Directory Page
Displays departure procedure chart.
DP
Displays standard terminal arrival procedure chart.
STAR
Displays approach procedure chart.
APR
Displays airport weather information chart.
WX
Displays NOTAM information for selected airport, when available.
NOTAM
When available, displays optional checklists
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
AFCS
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.7 for information on navigating MFD
page groups).
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page.
18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - GPS Status Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
EIS
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EGNOS, MSAS
and WAAS
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
AFCS
GPS Selection
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM Softkey
Selected
SBAS Softkey Selected
Figure 1-14 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
APPENDICES
• Satellite constellation diagram
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Satellite signal information status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
EIS
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GPS receiver status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is in the
process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected
continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view.
‘Acquiring’ is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for computing
a solution.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates ‘Inactive’. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ‘Active’.
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is selected)
AFCS
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
EIS
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
Refer to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the system.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or User waypoints, if
required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
AFCS
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is selected)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the
SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates Disabled. There may be a small delay for the GPS Status box to be
updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below
each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
INDEX
APPENDICES
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.7 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in section 1.3. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
EIS
Navigating the Page Menu Window
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on PFD
AFCS
Options with
FPL Window
Displayed on MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-15 Page Menu Examples
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD PAGE GROUPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The page group and active
page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs. The
current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/
Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page
name in the list remains the same.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Page Group Active Page Title
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pages in
Current
Group
Page Groups
AFCS
Figure 1-16 Page Title and Page Groups
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
INDEX
APPENDICES
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) selected first from
within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page (or
from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP PAGE GROUP (MAP)
• Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Traffic Map
• Weather Data Link (service optional)
• Terrain
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP (WPT)
• Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Airport Information
(Info-1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory Information
(Info-2 Softkey)
AFCS
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
• Intersection Information
APPENDICES
• NDB Information
• VOR Information
• VRP Information
• User Waypoint Information
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP (AUX)
• Weight Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Trip Planning
• Utility
• GPS Status
• System Setup 1/2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• XM Radio Pages
- XM Information
(Info Softkey)
- XM Radio
(Radio Softkey)
• Maintenance WiFi Setup
• System Status
• ADS-B Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Connext Setup
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Databases
AFCS
FLIGHT PLAN PAGE GROUP (FPL)
• Active Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Wide View, Narrow View (View Softkey)
• Flight Plan Catalog
INDEX
APPENDICES
- Stored Flight Plan (via New Softkey)
26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEAREST PAGE GROUP (NRST)
• Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Nearest Intersections
• Nearest NDB
• Nearest VOR
• Nearest VRP
• Nearest User WPTS
EIS
• Nearest Frequencies
• Nearest Airspaces
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages
• Departure Loading
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Arrival Loading
• Approach Loading
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-17 Procedure Loading Pages
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SYSTEM PAGES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are three system pages: System Setup 1, System Setup 2, and System
Status. The System Setup pages allows management of various system parameters, while the System Status Page
displays the status of all system LRUs.
SYSTEM SETUP PAGES
The System Setup pages allows management of the crew profiles. Also, fields shown in cyan text may be
edited for following system parameters:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Time display format (local or UTC )
• Displayed measurement units
• GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) range
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• Barometric Transition Alert (see the Flight Instruments Section)
• COM transceiver channel spacing (see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Airspace alerts (see the Flight Management Section)
• Displayed nearest airports (see the Flight Management Section)
• Arrival alert
• Stability & Protection (see the AFCS & Additional Features Sections)
• Flight Director Format (see the Flight Instruments Section)
• Audio Voice Format
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• MFD Data Bar (Navigation Status Box) fields
(see the Flight Management Section)
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup 1 or 2 Page.
AFCS
2) Select the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
The message ‘Restore Setup X Page Defaults?’ is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Figure 1-18 System Setup 1/2 Pages
28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Date/Time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-19 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. If local time
format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ field is highlighted.
AFCS
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-20 Date/Time Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Crew Profiles
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
crew profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen (Figure 1-8). The system can store up to 25
profiles; the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are
shown at the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Crew Profile’. From here, crew profiles may
be created, selected, renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from the system to an SD
card, or imported from an SD card into the system.
Figure 1-21 Crew Profile Management (System Setup 1 Page)
AFCS
Creating a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup 1 or 2 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Crew profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
APPENDICES
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or other previously created profile settings.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key.
30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired profile.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) Select the Import Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) The system displays the Crew Profile Importing window with ‘Import’ highlighted. Turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs,
then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Crew Profile Importing window.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ in the window below. With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page. The imported
profile becomes the active profile.
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
Import Successful
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-22 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup Page)
32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the Export Softkey. The system displays the Crew Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with ‘Export’ highlighted. To
change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the
desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with
‘Export’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on
the SD card with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key
to return to the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR
Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Export Successful
AFCS
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Figure 1-23 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Display Units
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
EIS
Category
Navigation Angle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Distance and Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude and Vertical
Speed
Temperature
AFCS
Fuel and Fuel
Flow***
Weight**
Position
Settings
Affected Quantities
Magnetic (North)* Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Nautical*
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Feet*
All altitudes on MFD
Meters
All elevations on MFD
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Pounds
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Pounds*
N/A
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’* All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
Exceptions
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
*** Not configurable
Table 1-2 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
Changing a display unit setting
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Arrival Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup 1 Page allows the Alerts Window arrival alerts to be turned
‘On/Off’ and the alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the Alerts Window and the PFD
Navigation Status Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a
user-specified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight
plan). When Arrival Alerts is set to ‘On’, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint” message
is displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]” is
displayed in the Alerts Window. When Arrival Alerts is set to ‘Off’, only the PFD Navigation Status Box
message “Arriving at waypoint” is displayed, and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is
approximately ten seconds.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-24 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
Enabling/disabling the Alerts Window arrival alert:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘On/Off’ field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
AFCS
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
Audio Alerts
APPENDICES
The Audio Box on the System Setup 2 Page allows the audio alert voice setting (male or female).
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin
dealer informed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU Information
or Airframe window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected
window.
AFCS
Figure 1-25 Example System Status Page
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label annunciator turns green indicting the softkey is selected) places the
cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the database window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label back to
MFD1 DB. MFD database information is displayed again in the database window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ANN Test Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
UTILITY PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX Utility Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a
record of the time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum
groundspeeds—are displayed from the time of the last reset. Refer to the Additional Features section for a
discussion on the Scheduler feature.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-26 Utility Page
Timers
The system timers available include:
AFCS
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD References Window and on the MFD AUX - Utility
Page)
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
APPENDICES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before
reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when
reset, the digits return to zero.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the ‘Up/Dn’ field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and
press the ENT Key.
5) With ‘Start?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’.
EIS
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
AFCS
Figure 1-27 Generic Timer (PFD Timer/References Window)
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
APPENDICES
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
INDEX
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 1-28 Timers (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Resetting the flight timer
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the departure timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Trip Statistics
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
EIS
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”,
“Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based
on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or
recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting
automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled,
messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
APPENDICES
Figure 1-29 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
EIS
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
AFCS
Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD and cause the Alerts Softkey label to change
to ‘Advisory’. Pressing the Advisory Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges the scheduler
message. The softkey reverts to the ‘Alerts’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is removed from the
display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Figure 1-30 PFD Alerts Window
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.8 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
• Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD Display’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’ or ‘MFD Key’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
INDEX
Figure 1-31 PFD Setup Menu
42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS
The Garmin G1000 includes an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon,
airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments,
navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained
in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– True airspeed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Navigation source
– Vspeed reference flags
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Indicated airspeed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– DME Information Window (optional)
• ADF/DME Tuning Window
• Altimeter, showing
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
– Barometric setting
• Timer/References Window, showing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Trend vector
– Generic timer
– Selected altitude
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
• Wind data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Barometric or temperature compensated
minimum descent altitude (MDA) or decision
height (DH)
AFCS
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Vspeed values
• ISA temperature deviation
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
21
19
20
1
18
17
16
2
EIS
15
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
13
4
12
5
11
6
10
7
9
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
15
Reference Altitude Bug
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
16
Altimeter
6
ISA Temperature Deviation
17
Reference Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
18
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
19
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
21
Attitude Indicator
11
Heading Bug
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
12
11
1
10
EIS
2
9
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8
7
4
6
8
CAS Window
2
Selected Heading
9
Selected Course
3
Wind Data Box
10
4
Inset Map
Required Vertical Speed
Indicator
11 Vertical Deviation Indication
5
Bearing Information Windows
12
VNV Target Altitude
6
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
Flight Plan Window
13
Terrain Annunciation
AFCS
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape
are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of 5 knots.
Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated airspeed is
displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never exceed speed (VNE), at which
point it turns red.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Indicated
Airspeed
Red
Pointer
at VNE
Vspeed
References
Low
Speed
Range
Speed
Ranges
AFCS
True
Airspeed
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A color-coded (red, white, green, amber) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote
flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red range is also
present for low speed awareness.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the number in the indicated airspeed pointer changes to amber. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VSpeeds (VX and VY) cannot be changed, however the speed flags can be turned on/off from the Timer/
References Window. When active (on), the speed flags are displayed at their respective locations to the right
of the airspeed scale.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
4) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Timer/References Window
Timer/References Menu
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vspeed flags can be turned on or off all at once.
Modifying Vspeeds (on, off):
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. Turn the large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100ft increments. If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments; the
small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments..
Reference
Altitude
Reference
Altitude
(Meters)
Indicated
Altitude
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Altitude
Trend
Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value has been set, this altitude is also available for
the Selected Altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-7 Altimeter
APPENDICES
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-7). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
INDEX
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QHN altimeter setting for the height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
EIS
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the STD Baro Softkey.
Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Setting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
AFCS
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing light blue barometric pressure setting
when crossing the transition altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Altitude in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-9 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance when
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS is available.
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI; Figure 2-10) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels
at 1000 and 2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or
descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the
edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
EIS
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VERTICAL DEVIATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-10) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-11) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.
VNV Target
Altitude
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
AFCS
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Glideslope
Indicator
APPENDICES
Required
Vertical
Speed
Figure 2-11 Glideslope Indicator
INDEX
Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)
52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
•
LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, and LP+V, is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
•
LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, LP+V). When one of these RNAV approaches is loaded into the flight plan, GPS is the
selected navigation source, and SBAS is used for vertical approach guidance, the Glidepath Indicator appears
as a magenta diamond (Figure 2-12). Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits.
The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower limits depend on approach service level.
If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
EIS
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
Glidepath
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
(excessive
deviation)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-12 Glidepath Indicator
AFCS
Figure 2-13 Glidepath Indicator and Vertical
Deviation Limit Indicators
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach, and between the FAF and MAP, the Vertical Deviation Limit
Indicators appear as vertical white lines (Figure 2-13) indicating the area where deviation exceeds allowable
limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator provides a scaled representation of +/- 75 feet
of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the lines represents the area of acceptable deviation. The
length of the lines will change while progressing through the final approach. When the Glidepath Indicator
enters an excessive deviation area, the Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators are amber (Figure
2-13).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick
marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond connected to a gray dashed line. The HSI also presents
turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation source information.
EIS
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (FMS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
15
14
13
1
12
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
11
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
5
10
6
9
7
8
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
To/From Indicator
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
Course Pointer
11
4
Navigation Source
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
12 Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
Lateral Deviation Scale
Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
7
Rotating Compass Card
15
8
OBS Mode Active
Lubber Line
INDEX
Figure 2-13 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The cyan bug
on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading.
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
EIS
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Track Indicator
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Heading Bug
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications
The Current Track Indicator, represented by a magenta diamond on the HSI, is the current over the ground
track the aircraft is flying.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
• True - References angles to true north (T)
• Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
55
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-17 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
TURN RATE INDICATOR
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Standard
Turn Rate
APPENDICES
Half Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 Degrees
per Second
INDEX
Figure 2-18 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Tuning Mode
Bearing 2
Pointer
EIS
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and FMS sources by
pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are single-line (BRG1) or
double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the navigation source.
The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a white ring. Bearing
pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Distance
Distance to
Bearing Source
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME Information Window
Pointer
Icon
Bearing
Source
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Station
Pointer
Identifier
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
Figure 2-19 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
• Bearing source (NAV, FMS)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, FMS)
• Frequency (NAV)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
AFCS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-19) are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following
information:
APPENDICES
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If FMS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if FMS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with a NAV source.
3) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (note: ADF radio
installation is optional).
EIS
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
AFCS
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
Scale
APPENDICES
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
INDEX
Figure 2-20 Course Deviation Indicator
58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, FMS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for FMS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by an FMSderived distance when coupled to the FMS. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with FMS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol. When
navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-21 Navigation Sources
Changing navigation sources:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from FMS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to FMS.
LOC1
Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
AFCS
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
VOR2
Selected
APPENDICES
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-22 Selecting a Navigation Source
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The system automatically switches from FMS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The FMS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
EIS
FMS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until FMS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. FMS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to
the FAF (see Figure 2-23), it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically
switches from FMS to LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fix Prior to the FAF
Glideslope Intercept Point
AFCS
Figure 2-23 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS CDI SCALING
When FMS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The current FMS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the selected FMS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-24 GPS CDI Setting
(AUX - System Setup Page)
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
APPENDICES
Departure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CDI Full-scale Deflection
When set to Auto (default), the FMS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-25, Table 2-1).
Missed
Approach
INDEX
Figure 2-25 Automatic CDI Scaling
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
EIS
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-26 and 2-27). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-26 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
62
FAF
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
angle based
on database
information
course width
2 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
350 ft
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CDI Full-scale Deflection
AFCS
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
Figure 2-27 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV and LP Approach CDI Scaling
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-26)
LNAV + V
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
L/VNAV
LPV
LP+V
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-27)
LP
MAPR
AFCS
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
EIS
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
0.3 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to amber.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
OBS MODE
APPENDICES
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the FMS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
GPS
Selected
EIS
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Figure 2-28 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-29. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 2-29 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
are displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD under normal conditions, or below the true airspeed in
Reversionary Display Mode. Both are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C).
EIS
Normal Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reversionary Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-30 Outside Air Temperature
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WIND DATA
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
Figure 2-31 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
3) Press one of the Option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• Option 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
AFCS
• Option 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
• Option 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in the table.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phase of
Flight
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-32 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
AFCS
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
Criteria
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The System Messages Window conveys messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the G1000
System. When a new message is issued, the MSG Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew. It continues to flash
until selected, which opens the System Messages Window and acknowledges the message(s) which initiated
the flashing. When the window is open, messages for which the trigger conditions no longer exist turn gray.
Messages generated while the window is open are not automatically displayed, but cause the MSG Softkey to
begin flashing again. Pressing the MSG Softkey while the System Messages Window is open closes the window,
unless the MSG Softkey is flashing.
CAS Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
System
Messages
Window
Softkey
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-33 G1000 Alerting System
68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Inner Marker
EIS
Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-34 Marker Beacon Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a cyan
background and flashes for five seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude
changes to cyan text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
AFCS
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds.
Deviation of ±200 ft
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-35 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is only
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
available when TAWS-B alerting has been inhibited.
EIS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashes
for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS Inhibited
Annunciation
Glidepath
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Annunciation
Figure 2-36 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
AFCS
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set
in the Timer/References Window and is reset when the power is cycled. When active, the altitude setting is
displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears
at the reference altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the
MDA/DH:
APPENDICES
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN or COMP
MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for
COMP MIN) once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
INDEX
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text turn amber and the aural alert, “Minimums. Minimums”,
is heard.
70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Within 100 ft
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Within 2500 ft
Altitude Reached
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
EIS
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-37 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled or a new approach is activated.
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO or TEMP COMP. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and then
enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-38 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur (Figure
2-39). Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
GPS LOI
Right of HSI
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
GPS INTEG OK Right of HSI
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS
Lower left of
DR
position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan
aircraft symbol
waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Annunciation
Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 2-5 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-39 Example HSI Annunciations
APPENDICES
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
• Ground Speed
INDEX
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
Nose High
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose Low
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-40 Pitch Attitude Warnings
• PFD Setup Menu
• Inset Map
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• ISA temperature deviation
– Timer/References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Wind data
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Selected Heading readout
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Course readout
– Messages
• Ground Speed
• Transponder Status Box
– Procedures
• True Airspeed
APPENDICES
• AFCS Annunciations
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• System Time
AFCS
• Traffic Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from each PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
73
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Blank Page
74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by automatically monitoring critical
system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of flight. The Engine Indication System (EIS)
displays electrical, fuel, and engine information on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD). EIS
information can also be fully expanded to an entire page by pressing the Engine Softkey or turning the large FMS
Knob to select the EIS - Engine Page
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 3-1 MFD with EIS display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the
caution or warning ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding displays flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red or amber“X” is
displayed across the instrument.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
4
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
7
AFCS
8
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9
Figure 3-3 Engine Display when Engine Page is displayed
INDEX
Figure 3-2 Engine Display
76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
2 Exhaust Gas Temperature
Displays the exhaust gas temperature of the hottest cylinder in °F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 Tachometer (RPM)
3 Fuel Flow Indicator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(EGT)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
(FFLOW GPH)
4 Oil Pressure Indicator
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
EIS
5 Oil Temperature Indicator
(OIL °F)
6 Alternator Current
Displays each alternator current in amperes
7 Voltage (VOLTS)
Displays the bus voltage
8 Battery Current
Displays the battery current in amperes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(ALTR AMPS)
9 Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(BATT AMPS)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each side of a standard fuel
tank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EIS - Engine Page displays all engine, fuel, electrical, and fuel calculation information. To access this
page, press the Engine Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob and select the EIS - Engine Page.
Engine
(optional)
Tabs
Engine
DEC Fuel
INC Fuel
RST Fuel
CO RST
EIS
Select the Engine Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 3-4 Engine Page Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Level 1
Engine
Level 2
Description
BACK
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit page
Resets displayed fuel remaining to tabs and fuel used to zero
Tabs
(optional)
Decreases
displayedDEC
fuel
remaining in 1-gal increments
DECEngine
Fuel LEAN
SYSTEM
FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
BACK
CO RST
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
INC Fuel
the BACK
Softkey and
to fuel used to zero
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuelSelect
capacity
for aircraft
RST Fuel
return to the top-level softkeys.
Resets the CO Detector (optional)
CO RST
Engine
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
ASSIST
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
10
1
AFCS
2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3
4
9
APPENDICES
5
6
INDEX
8
7
Figure 3-5 Engine Page
78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Displays the exhaust gas temperature in °F
3
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
4
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
5
Oil Temperature Indicator
(OIL °F)
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
6
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each side of a standard fuel tank.
7
Carbon Monoxide Detector
(CO DETECTOR)
Displays the amount of carbon monoxide is present in Parts Per Million (PPM)
(optional)
8
Fuel Calculations Group
(FUEL CALC)
Displays calculated fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), and range (in
nautical miles, RANGE NM), and fuel efficiency (in nautical miles per gallon,
NMPG) based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow
totalizer
9
Engine Hours
(TACH TIME)
Displays the total time in hours the engine has been in service
Displays exhaust gas temperatures for all cylinders in °F
11 Electrical Group
Displays alternator (ALTR AMPS) and battery (BATT AMPS) currents in amperes
and bus voltage (VOLTS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10 Exhaust Gas Temperature
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
(EGT °F)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
EIS
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tachometer
(RPM)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
(EGT °F)
(ELECTRICAL)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DC current for the left and right alternators (pointers labeled “L” and “R”) and voltage for the DC bus are
shown along color-coded horizontal scales, with numerical display above the scale. The ammeter displays the
battery load in amperes (amps) along a horizontal scale, with a white tick mark indicating zero amps. The
horizontal scales and pointers will not appear in Reversionary Mode.
EIS
Alternator
Current
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bus Voltage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Ammeter
Figure 3-6 Electrical Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE BAR GRAPH
AFCS
Exhaust Gas (EGT) temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit are displayed for each cylinder using a bar graph on
the Engine Page. A temperature display for each cylinder is shown at the top of the graph. Cylinders whose
EGTs are in the normal range appear in white. The temperature display is replaced with white dashes if the
temperature exceeds the normal range.
Normal
Temperature
Range Exceeded
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Exhaust Gas
Temperatures
Figure 3-7 Exhaust Gas
Temperatures (Normal Range)
80
Figure 3-8 Exhaust Gas Temperatures
(Normal Range Exceeded)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), range (in nautical miles, RANGE NM), and fuel efficiency
(in statute miles per gallon, MPG) are calculated based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the
fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range also takes into account the aircraft’s heading and the wind direction
and speed.
EIS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
On the Engine Page, use the DEC Fuel and INC Fuel Softkeys to obtain the desired fuel remaining (GAL REM).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
On the Engine Page, select the RST Fuel Softkey; this resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to the maximum
fuel capacity for the aircraft and fuel used to zero.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Set Fuel Remaining
Calculated Fuel Used
Calculated Endurance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Calculated Range
Fuel Efficiency
Figure 3-9 Fuel Calculations Group
AFCS
A map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations is the Fuel Range Ring, which graphically illustrates the
aircraft’s remaining range based on the endurance (ENDUR), heading, groundspeed, and wind direction and
speed. The solid green circle represents the range until all the remaining fuel is depleted. The dashed green
circle indicates the aircraft range until only reserve fuel remains. Once on reserve fuel, the range is indicated
by a solid amber circle.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Fuel Range Ring shifts position in relation to the aircraft according to wind effects. For example, more
fuel is required for flying into a headwind, and the aircraft’s decreased range in that direction is indicated by
the Fuel Range Ring shifting toward the tail of the Aircraft Symbol.
APPENDICES
The amount of reserve fuel (only for purposes of the Fuel Range Ring) is set on the Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu in terms of remaining flight time. When enabled, the Fuel Range Ring appears on the Navigation
Map Page, the Weather Data Link Page, and PFD Inset Map. (refer to Flight Management for more information
on the Fuel Range Ring).
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Carbon Monoxide Detector (CO DETECTOR) is displayed on the Engine Page, below the TACH TIME
display. The carbon monoxide detector provides information in Parts Per Million (PPM) and detects the amount
of carbon monoxide present in PPM.
Reset the Carbon Monoxide Detector:
EIS
On the Engine Page, push CO RST softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-10 Carbon Monoxide Detector (CO DETECTOR)
OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE GAUGES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Engine oil pressure and temperature for each engine are shown along horizontal bar indicators. Oil pressure
is shown in pounds per square inch (psi) and temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F). If the oil pressure pointer
enters the amber band, a caution is issued. If the oil pressure or oil temperature pointers enter the red band, a
warning is issued.
Figure 3-11 Oil Pressure and Temperature Gauges
FUEL QUANTITY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The fuel display shows the fuel quantity in each tank in gallons (gal). Fuel quantity for each tank is normally
shown along a vertical slider scale with corresponding displays below each gauge. A total fuel quantity value
is shown at the bottom of the display between the fuel quantity gauges. A caution or warning is issued for low
fuel quantity.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Tank Fuel
Quantities
Total Fuel Quantity
Figure 3-12 Fuel Display
82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EIS DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a PFD or MFD display failure, the display(s) operating in Reversionary Mode are configured
to present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for information about
display reversionary mode).
The Engine Display, in reversionary mode, is identical to the normal EIS Display on the MFD.
EIS Display
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-13 Reversionary Mode (EIS Shown)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
83
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Blank Page
84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the G1000 is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S Transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figure 4-1).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and NRST Window
86
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected and
decoded COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
Nearest Airports Window – Display by pressing NRST Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes and Auto-tune entries
when NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large
knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted
cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17
22
23
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
88
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker (if installed). COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in the P28.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Selects and deselects telephone audio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color
changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
EIS
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
AFCS
Tuning Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
INDEX
APPENDICES
COM3 is reserved for an optional COM radio.
90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
EIS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
APPENDICES
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EIS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window
Select the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-10, 4-11, and 4-12).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
EIS
Nearest Airports Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press ENT Key to load
frequency into PFD
COM Standby Field.
Cursor then advances
to the next frequency.
Select INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows
APPENDICES
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
INDEX
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.
EIS
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Squelch
Indication
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch
VOLUME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
AFCS
Tuning Box
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Selecting
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, DME, or ADF Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard
over the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFDs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
100
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code Identifier
for the MCI VOR is On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
VOLUME
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor
on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
Select the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
EIS
Outer Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
AFCS
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
APPENDICES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF/DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
The G1000 system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by
entering the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may
be labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and
the ENT Key.
AFCS
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF
Mode
ADF
Volume
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DME
Tuning
Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window
108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of
the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The G1000 System does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Character
Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
0000.0.
AFCS
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Transfer
the ADF
Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
EIS
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Mode
Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
AFCS
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%. The ADF volume level is the same for both Audio Panels.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Volume
Figure 4-33 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
EIS
DME
Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-34 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 GTX 345 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 335 and GTX 345 (optional) Mode S Transponders provide Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation
and reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 4-35 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AFCS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-36 Standby Mode
APPENDICES
MANUAL ON MODE
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies as well as transmission of acquisition and extended squitters, including ADS-B out. Mode S replies
will not include altitude information. Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The ON indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne
and white while on the ground.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ON Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
Airborne (Green Indication)
On-Ground (White Indication)
EIS
Figure 4-37 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The white Altitude Reporting Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground.
White Altitude Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey while on the ground. White
Altitude Mode generates Mode S replies to discrete interrogations as well as transmission of acquisition and
extended squitters, including ADS-B out. Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call replies are inhibited.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If Altitude Mode is selected while on the ground, a white ALT indication and transponder code appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
On-Ground ALT
Mode (Mode C
Altitude Reporting
Inhibited)
Figure 4-38 Altitude Mode
AFCS
The green Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Green Altitude
Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey while airborne. Green Altitude Mode
generates Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S replies as well as transmissions of acquisition and extended squitters
including ADS-B out.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Altitude Mode is selected while airborne, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are
provided with pressure altitude information.
APPENDICES
Airborne ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-39 Altitude Mode
REPLY STATUS
INDEX
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reply to
Interrogation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 4-40 Reply Indication
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
EIS
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Selecting the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
Entering
a Code
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Select the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
APPENDICES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
INDEX
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
EIS
VFR Code
Figure 4-43 VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is selected, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the IDENT Softkey is selected while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
AFCS
Select the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-44 IDENT Softkey and Indication
116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the G1000.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker (if installed). Pressing the SPKR Key selects and
deselects the cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings
(autopilot, traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Volume can be adjusted though configuration.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-45 Speaker Key
AFCS
INTERCOM
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and a stereo music input for the pilot, copilot
and up to four passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft
radios.
APPENDICES
Figure 4-46 Intercom Controls
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
117
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
OFF
OFF
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot;
passengers; music
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot;
passengers; music
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot;
passengers; music
ON
OFF
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot
Copilot;
passengers;
music
Copilot;
passengers;
music
EIS
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
OFF
ON
Selected radios;
aural alerts; pilot;
passengers; music
Copilot
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; passengers;
music
ON
ON
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot
Passengers;
music
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Passenger Hears
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
EIS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Volume Annunciation
AFCS
Squelch Annunciation
Figure 4-47 Volume/Squelch Control
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is pressed on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel
Figure 4-48 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
AFCS
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
INDEX
Figure 4-49 Play Key
120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SPLIT COM OPERATION
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-50 Split COM Operation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Music1 and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
EIS
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: Music1 and Music2. The pilot and
copilot hear Music1 and the passengers hear Music2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm stereo phone jacks can be installed in
convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged
into the Music1 or Music2 jacks.
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CREW MUSIC
Crew music (Music1) can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT ICS
Annunciators are extinguished. Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is
illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Music Muting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Crew music is always
soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to
its original volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and
four seconds.
Music Muting Enable/Disable
AFCS
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off.
When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled. Crew music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
PASSENGER MUSIC
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Passenger music (Music2) can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ is activated, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the G1000 System, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
AFCS
Squelch
Annunciation
Volume
Annunciation
Figure 4-51 Audio Panel Controls
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise. This will set the headset intercom audio level to max
volume (least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
INDEX
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-52 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM TUNING FAILURE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
AFCS
Figure 4-53 COM Tuning Failure
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.
PFD FAILURE, DUAL SYSTEM
APPENDICES
If PFD1 fails, COM1 and NAV1 display a red X on both remaining displays. NAV1 is unavailable. COM1
automatically tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown. The COM1 emergency frequency is available
to both the copilot and pilot.
INDEX
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-54 Frequency Section of PFD2 Display after PFD1 Failure
124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If PFD2 fails, COM2 and NAV2 display a red X on the remaining PFD display. NAV2 is unavailable. COM2
tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown. The COM2 emergency frequency is available to both the
copilot and pilot.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-55 PFD1 Display after PFD2 Failure
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
125
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
EIS
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: one Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of GPS
navigation functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels are
only available with SBAS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD.
When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The Inset Map is
displayed by pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing the Inset Map Softkey.
Selecting the Map Off Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the Inset Map can be reduced by pressing the Map/
HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed data for the Navigation Map
can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation Map can be oriented three different
ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
APPENDICES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Current Track Indicator
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD (Inset Map)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Flight Plan Leg
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
APPENDICES
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
INDEX
Figure 5-3 PFD Navigation Status Box
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Description
Symbol
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
EIS
Active Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Symbol
Right Holding Pattern
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
Fuel on Board
Fuel over Destination
Ground Speed
Temperature at Standard Pressure
ETA at Final Destination
Minimum Safe Altitude
True Airspeed
Track Angle Error
Track
Vertical Speed Required
Cross-Track Error
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
FOB
FOD
GS
ISA
LDG
MSA
TAS
TKE
TRK
VSR
XTK
Bearing
Destination Airport Identifier
Distance
Distance to Go
Desired Track
Endurance
ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Flight Timer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
BRG
DEST
DIS
DTG
DTK
END
ENR
ESA
ETA
ETE
FLT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-4 MFD Navigation Status Box
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the Aux-System Setup 1 Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
APPENDICES
1) Select the System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the desired data.
5) Press the ENT Key. Selecting the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names
• Map range
•Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Obstacle data
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All Map Group Pages (MAP)
All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
AUX - Trip Planning
All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Direct-to Window
PFD Inset Map
Procedure Loading Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft position
relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where the
aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper right corner of the map.
Figure 5-5 Map Orientation
• North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
INDEX
• Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Settings
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-6 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Settings Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ field.
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
North Up Above Field
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-7 Map Settings Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Auto Zoom On
APPENDICES
Figure 5-8 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
INDEX
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Settings Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times (set on the
Map Settings Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
EIS
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Settings Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
AFCS
Manual Range Override
Time Out
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Auto Zoom:
Off, On, MFD, PFD, All
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
APPENDICES
Figure 5-9 Map Settings Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ on/off field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS Knob.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Auto Zoom’ display selection
field.
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘ALL’ using the small FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max Look FWD’ field. Times
are from zero to 999 minutes.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Pointer Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Information about Point
of Interest
Map Pointer on
POI
INDEX
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level
(MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Map Pointer on
Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Information about
Airspace
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
EIS
NAVAID
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on the boundary of an airspace.
AFCS
2) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and center the map on the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Airspace
Information
INDEX
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Airspace Information
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement Line
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map (the profile map is not available if TAWS-A is configured).
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
EIS
Navigation Map
Black Background
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Off
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Topographic Data
on Profile Map
TOPO On
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation maps:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the MAP Opt Softkey.
2) Select the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Select the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Inset Map:
1) Select the Map/HSI Softkey .
2) Select the TOPO Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the PFD Inset Map. When topographic data is
removed from the PFD Map, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
139
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Absolute Terrain On
EIS
Terrain Off
Figure 5-17 PFD Inset Map - Absolute Terrain Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying/removing topographic data using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ field.
6) Select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Terrain Display
Range
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain Display
On/Topo/Off
INDEX
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Terrain Display Setup
140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Settings pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Maximum Displayed Elevation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
APPENDICES
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Topo Scale
On/Off
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Topo Scale Setup
MAP SYMBOLS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
AFCS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
User Waypoint
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
25
40
INDEX
APPENDICES
Highways and Roads
Interstate Highway (Freeway)
50
400
International Highway (Freeway)
50
400
US Highway (National Highway)
15
150
State Highway (Local Highway)
2.5
100
4
25
Local Road (Local Road)
142
N/A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Symbol
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Land Symbols
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Large City (> 200,000)
100
1000
Medium City (> 50,000)
Small City (> 5,000)
50
25
400
100
State/Province
400
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
1
1000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
25
EIS
7.5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Railroads (RAILROAD)
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
AVIATION SYMBOLS
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
See Additional Features
Runway Extension
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
150
300
50
100
3
20
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Large Airport (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airport (8100 ft > Longest Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airport (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
50
Intersection (INT)
15
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB)
15
30
VOR
150
300
N/A
N/A
25
1000
1000
1000
N/A
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
VNAV Constraints
APPENDICES
N/A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
N/A
VOR Compass Rose On/Off
N/A
AFCS
Missed Approach Preview On/Off (Missed APPR)
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Symbols
Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Smart Airspace On/Off
Airspace Altitude Labels (Airspace ALT LBL) On/Off
N/A
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
N/A
N/A
Class C Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
N/A
N/A
Class D Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling)
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
AFCS
Table 5-3 Airspcae Symbol Information
SYMBOL SETUP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway extensions,
railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear on the
display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from each
runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings option.
APPENDICES
Setting up the ‘Land’, ‘Aviation’ or ‘Airspace’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
Item On or Off
Maximum Display Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Item On or Off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Land Group Setup
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-22 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Aviation Group Setup
APPENDICES
Item On or Off
Maximum Display Range
INDEX
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Airspace Group Setup
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DECLUTTER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Detail Level
EIS
Detail Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map - Detail Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
Select the Detail Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Select the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 5-4 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Detail 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
EIS
Detail 2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Detail 3
AFCS
Table 5-4 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
EIS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
AFCS
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-25 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
APPENDICES
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY Softkey
selections, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also
be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Opt Softkey.
2) Select the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
INDEX
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AWY LO).
148
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AWY HI).
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AWY Off).
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ On/Off field.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Maximum Display Range
Item On or Off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Airways Group Setup
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range field.
AFCS
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The following items are configured on the airways menu:
Airways Symbols
Symbol
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T Routes)
50
100
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q Routes)
50
100
APPENDICES
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Table 5-5 Airways Symbol Information
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TRACK VECTOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for
the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Track Vector
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map -Track Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setting’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Track Vector’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selected Altitude Arc On/Off
INDEX
Wind Vector On/Off
SVT Field of View On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
Fuel Range Ring
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Wind Vector On/Off, Field of View On/Off,
Select ALT Arc On/Off, Track Vector Setup, Fuel Range (RSV) Setup
150
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WIND VECTOR
Wind Direction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Speed
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
EIS
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Wind Vector’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Total Endurance Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Fuel Range (RSV)’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
152
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is
only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-31 Navigation Map - Field of View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Field of View’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actuallly climbing or descending.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selected
Altitude
Intercept Arc
Figure 5-32 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
154
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Identifier Entry Field
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the database,
displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation
leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint pages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
Entered Waypoint on
Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
Waypoint Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-33 Waypoint Information Window
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
Identifier with
Duplicates
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Duplicate
Waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Duplicate Message
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-34 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
156
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRPORTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
EIS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airpport’, ‘Runways’, and ‘Frequencies’. For airports
with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the Airport
Information Page by pressing the Info softkey until 1 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AFCS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-35 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
APPENDICES
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
Airport Directory
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-36 Airport Directory Page Example
The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the Info Softkey until
2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory informantion shown (if available) on the Airport
Directory Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published Approach, Freq.
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
158
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-6 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of
up to 25 of the nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they
are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
EIS
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
Nearest Softkey
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
APPENDICES
- Lat/Long
Figure 5-38 Airport Information Window on PFD
INDEX
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘Nearest Airports’,
‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’, and ‘Approaches’.
160
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to eight frequencies,
and up to eight approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
EIS
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Airport
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
Window Selection
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-39 Nearest Airport Page
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Select the Nearest Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘Back’) or press the CLR Key.
The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves
through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
INDEX
3) Select the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list
is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, select the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 3000 feet (or meters) for runway length
and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft).
5) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Nearest Airport Criteria
INDEX
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
Figure 5-40 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
162
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
EIS
Intersection Identifier
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Selected Intersection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-41 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘Nearest INT’, ‘Information’, and ‘Reference VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to 21 intersections are visible at a time. If there
are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that fact
is displayed.
EIS
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest
Intersection
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-42 Nearest Intersections Page
164
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
EIS
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-43 NDB Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
AFCS
Selecting an NDB:
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘Nearest NDB’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to 21 NDBs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
Nearest NDB
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NDB Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-44 Nearest NDB Page
166
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS navigation signals, or to
quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information
Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information
Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
EIS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Selected VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-45 VOR Information Page
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: Low Altitude, High Altitude, and Terminal.
AFCS
Selecting a VOR:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV
frequency from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations
in three boxes labeled ‘Nearest VOR’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to 21 VORs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information is dashed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
VOR Information
Nearest VOR
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
AFCS
VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-46 Nearest VOR Page
168
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VRPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VRP Information Page is used to view information about visual reporting points (VRPs). In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected VRP and surrounding area, the VRP Information Page displays VRP
information in two boxes labeled ‘VRP’ and ‘Information’’.
VRP Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected VRP
- VRP Name
EIS
VRP Information
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected VRP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-47 VRP Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the VRP Information Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of the VRP in the VRP Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the Nearest VRP Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VRP Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. In addition to displaying a
map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs in two
boxes labeled ‘Nearest VRP’ and ‘Information’. The list only includes VRPs that are within 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. Up to 21 VRPs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no VRPs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VRPs is displayed. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
VRP Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest VRP
Nearest VRP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VRP Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-48 Nearest VRP Page
170
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has
been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power
down.
EIS
User Waypoint Info
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
User Waypoint List
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-49 User Waypoint Information Page
Selecting a User Waypoint:
AFCS
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
User Waypoint Info
Selected User
Waypoint
- Comment
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reference Wpt Info
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-50 Nearest User Waypoint Page
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AFCS
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the Information window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “Temporary” or “Normal” by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
172
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the Information window using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “Temporary” or “Normal” by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-51 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
EIS
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the Information window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “Temporary” or “Normal” by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
174
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Select the Rename Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
AFCS
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Select the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
176
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Class D Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Alert Area
Class C Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
Warning Area
APPENDICES
Figure 5-52 Airspaces
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
EIS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Airspace Alerts Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
Figure 5-53 System Settings Page - Airspace Alerts
178
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Airspace Group in the Map Settings Menu. See
Table 5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace Agency’, ‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’.
EIS
Airspace Alerts Info
Airspace 1
Airspace 2
Airspace 3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Associated Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Figure 5-54 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
Alerts and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or more
frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Select the Alerts Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PFD Alerts Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less than
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
EIS
Table 5-7 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The function
does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the airspace. If the
current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is
shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace,
the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-55 Smart Airspace
Turning smart airspace on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Group’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ in the ‘Group’ Box and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ field in the Aviation Map Setup Window.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace ‘On’ or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace ‘Off’.
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
180
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD Controller or the
PFD, is quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Course
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Figure 5-56 Direct-to Window - MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
EIS
Activation Command
Figure 5-57 Direct-to Window - PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
INDEX
Figure 5-58 Waypoint Submenu
182
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any Nearest, Recent or User waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
APPENDICES
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
INDEX
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
1) Select the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press
the FMS Knob.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
184
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Menu
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Cancel Direct-To NAV
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-59 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘Course’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Page Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Clear Vertical Constraints
Figure 5-60 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
186
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight Plan Leg Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Leg
Roll Steering Path †
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
AFCS
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering path. When a future roll
steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll steering path.
Table 5-8 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can
be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
APPENDICES
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
EIS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn Anticipation
Arc
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Deviation
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-61 Active Flight Plan Page
188
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
EIS
Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Figure 5-63 Flight Plan Catalog Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
APPENDICES
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APPR mode). The
system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the small FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
3) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays
a blank Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or user
waypoints).
EIS
b) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The Set Runway Window is displayed with the Runway field highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway and press the ENT Key.
d) Press the ENT Key again to add the runway to the flight plan.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the destination airport identifier field.
5) Select the destination airport and runway.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays
a blank Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or user
waypoints).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The Set Runway Window is displayed with the Runway field highlighted.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway and press the ENT Key.
d) Press the ENT Key again to add the runway to the flight plan.
AFCS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the the Enroute Headerm, an enroute waypoint, or the dashes below the
header. (If the header is selected, the new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or
the dashes are selected, the new waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item.)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays
a blank Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or user
waypoints).
APPENDICES
b) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu
of waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
INDEX
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
190
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
EIS
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays
a blank Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or user
waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The Set Runway Window is displayed with the Runway field highlighted.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway and press the ENT Key.
d) Press the ENT Key again to add the runway to the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the destination airport identifier field.
6) Select the destination airport and runway.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays
a blank Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or user
waypoints).
b) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The Set Runway Window is displayed with the Runway field highlighted.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
d) Press the ENT Key again to add the runway to the flight plan.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the the Enroute Headerm, an enroute waypoint, or the dashes below the
header. (If the header is selected, the new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or
the dashes are selected, the new waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item.)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays
a blank Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or user
waypoints).
APPENDICES
b) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu
of waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
8) Repeat step number 7 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
9) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
Figure 5-64 Flight Plan Import
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
INDEX
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
192
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
EIS
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Export Successful
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Figure 5-65 Flight Plan Export
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Flight Stream 510 Bluetooth wireless
connection. Transfer of a flight plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Previewing a flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Or:
EIS
Select the Preview Softkey to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key,
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Ignoring a flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
still be available on the Flight Plan Catalog page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
Select the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight
plan will still be available on the Flight Plan Catalog page.
AFCS
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pending Flight Plan
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
Preview Softkey
Ignore Softkey
INDEX
Figure 5-66 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
194
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
Pending Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Store? or Activate?
Selection
Store Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Delete Softkey
Activate Softkey
Figure 5-67 Preview Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storing a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
6) Select the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
INDEX
Activating a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
4) Select the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan becomes
the active flight plan and is removed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
5) Select the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
Or:
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan is removed
from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
Deleting all pending flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
INDEX
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
6)
196
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans are
limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in
the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-68 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Flight Plan Full Message
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Figure 5-69 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press
the ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Figure 5-70 Duplicate Waypoints Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
APPENDICES
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
INDEX
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
198
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
EIS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected Airway
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-71 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and select the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airway Exit Points
Available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-72 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Inserted Airway Header
APPENDICES
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
INDEX
Figure 5-73 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
200
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the
list of airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to another
waypoint.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
EIS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan Name
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AFCS
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan
Figure 5-74 Stored Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMKC
Preview of
Selected
Departure
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-75 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Select the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
202
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
EIS
Departure Transition
Points Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-76 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Departure Header
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT3.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-78 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Select the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
204
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY3
Preview of
Selected Arrival
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-79 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Arrival Header
AFCS
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY3)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-80 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected
Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-81 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach Channel field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
INDEX
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
206
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
EIS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-82 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAVGPS Y 35R LPV)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-83 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Select the Edit Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
AFCS
Stored Flight Plan Info
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-84 Stored Flight Plan Information
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
208
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Select the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
AFCS
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
210
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
212
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
EIS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-85 Along Track Offset
APPENDICES
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
INDEX
3) Select the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
214
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
While flying a parallel track:
EIS
• Initiating a direct-to will cancel the parallel track and fly direct-to the selected waypoint.
• Initiating a hold at the present position will cancel the parallel track and fly the holding pattern.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Initiating a hold at a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is required to fly
to the hold waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the parallel track will be
resumed. Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be resumed upon exiting the hold.
Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a
result of the course change.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active Flight Plan
prior to Parallel Track
Selecting Parallel
Track
AFCS
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the ‘Direction’ field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Parallel Track’ is
highlighted.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-87 Parallel Track Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Parallel Track
Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Original Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Parallel Track
Figure 5-88 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
APPENDICES
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation prompt
is displayed, but disabled. If an approach leg is active, the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the
parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance
results in an unreasonable route geometry (e.g., there is a sharp turn of more than 120 degrees), the status indicates
that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Invalid Route Geometry’). If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’). Parallel track is also unavailable for a
leg if there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active
Parallel track will be cancelled if the active leg changes to a leg where one of the preceding is true.
216
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activation of parallel track will apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that does not
meet the criteria for parallel track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track at the beginning
of that leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Subdued Prompt (Unavailable)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unavailable Status
Active Leg Incompatible
Unavailable Status
Invalid Geometry
Unavailable Status
Approach Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-89 Parallel Track Unavailable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
AFCS
Active Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-90 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a flight plan leg:
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Select the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Current
Active Leg
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Destination
Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-91 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
218
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
Confirmation Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-92 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Select the View Softkey to display the CUM and Leg-Leg Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or select the Leg-Leg Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Select the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Wide Softkey, Narrow Softkey,
Leg-Leg Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-93 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
Switching between wide and narrow view:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Select the View Softkey to display the Wide and Narrow Softkeys.
3) Select the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or select the Narrow Softkey to display the narrow view.
INDEX
4) Select the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
220
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wide Softkey, Narrow Softkey,
Leg-Leg Softkey, CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-94 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
All Airways
Collapsed View
APPENDICES
V4.SLN Airway
Expanded View
INDEX
Figure 5-95 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
EIS
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
222
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
INDEX
Figure 5-96 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’ instead of ‘Activate?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
224
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
Editing a user-defined hold:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Edit Hold’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ window appears with the
course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Update?’ is highlighted to update the hold.
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
AFCS
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the Direct To Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Right or Left)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Activate Hold
INDEX
Figure 5-97 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
226
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Direction
(Inbound or Outbound)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
INDEX
Hold At Direct To Waypoint Selection
Figure 5-98 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
EIS
The system system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cncl VNV Softkey
ENBL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-99 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Select the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the Active VNV Profile box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Select the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
228
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and
time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items
displayed in the Active VNV Profile box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical
guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
EIS
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
After VNV Direct-to
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-100 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
3) Select the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the Active VNV Profile box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Select the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the Active VNV Profile box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Displayed Text
Examples
White Text
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Cyan Text with Pencil Icon
Cyan Text
Cross AT 2,300 ft
AFCS
Temperature
Compensated
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-101 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
230
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5OOOFT
Altitude calculated by the system estimating the altitude of the aircraft
as it passes over the navigation point. No white line above or below to
indicate a potential constraint.
5OOOFT
Altitude is designated for use in determining
vertical guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual
designation or manual data entry.
5OOOFT
Altitude retrieved from the navigation database. White line above or
below indicates the type of constraint, as shown in the preceding figure.
These altitudes are provided as a reference, and are not designated to be
used in determining vertical guidance.
The system cannot use this altitude in
determining vertical guidance because of an
invalid constraint condition.
EIS
5OOOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cyan Text
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
White Text
Table 5-9 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system
automatically uses the altitudes loaded with the arrival or approach for giving vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Note that these altitudes are displayed as cyan text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is
always a “reference only” altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide
vertical guidance. In this case, the FAF altitude can be designated.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
APPENDICES
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
EIS
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
AFCS
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
INDEX
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
232
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using any
Procedures (PROC) Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and destination airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually intitiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-102 Procedure Leg Identifiers
234
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
Departure Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Departure Choices
APPENDICES
Departure Preview
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-103 Departure Selection
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Departure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Departure
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing available departures at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-104 Departure Loading
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
APPENDICES
Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the Departure Information Page:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
INDEX
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
236
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Select a different departure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
EIS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Departure Information Page Menu.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
INDEX
Figure 5-105 Arrival Selection
238
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-106 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the Arrival Information Page:
APPENDICES
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
EIS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information Page Menu.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
INDEX
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load & Activate” is given (“Load &
Activate” is only available for the active flight plan). “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan
without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate
waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure available for quick activation when needed.
“Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance
to the first waypoint in the approach.
EIS
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Example on HSI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory
vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima (downgrades
(available only if to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided (downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS available) SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima (downgrades
(available only if to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels
according to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance
in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is
displayed on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases
where LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach
service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
APPENDICES
Table 5-10 Approach Service Levels
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach Channel field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, ‘TEMP COMP’ or ‘RAD ALT’, and press the
ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
242
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Available Procedure Actions
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach Preview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loaded Procedures
Approach Choices
Selected Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-107 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
APPENDICES
Figure 5-108 Approach Loading
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob
to select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the
small FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The
approach is previewed on the map.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
244
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
AFCS
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
EIS
Press the Go-Around Button.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6600ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,600 feet is reached. After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Course to Altitude Leg
Figure 5-109 Course to Altitude
INDEX
APPENDICES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
246
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Temperature Compensation Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the Temperature Compensation Window on the
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD, or in the References Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system,
therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums.
Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation to the
MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Temperature
AFCS
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
APPENDICES
Figure 5-110 Temperature Compensation
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
247
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Cancel
Compensation?
Highlighted
Activate
Compensation?
Highlighted
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 5-111 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-112 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Temperature Compensation Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
INDEX
APPENDICES
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
Trip Statistics
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Figure 5-113 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are from the
aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information
is GPS ground speed.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
• Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information
is GPS altitude.
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTs) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
INDEX
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
250
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current
fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated by taking
the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density Altitude
• True Airspeed
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs) mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs selection).
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Figure 5-114 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
APPENDICES
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-115 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Select the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Select the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Select the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the Departure Time field and enter the desired value. Press the
ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat
until all desired values have been entered.
252
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WEIGHT PLANNING
NOTE: All weight planning page data fields display data rounded to the nearest 10 pounds or 5 kilograms.
Fuel Weight Calculator
- Zero Fuel Weight Calculation
- Fuel on Board Entry
- Aircraft Weight Calculation
- Estimated Landing Weight Calculation
- Estimated Landing Fuel Calculation
- Fuel Reserve Entry
- Excess Fuel Calculation
EIS
Basic Empty Weight Entry Pilot and Stores Weight Entry Basic Operating Weight Calculation Passenger(s) Weight Entry Cargo Weight Entry Zero Fuel Weight Calculation -
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A/C Payload Calculator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Empty Weight Softkey
(selects Basic Empty Weight)
Figure 5-116 Weight Planning Page
Entering basic empty weight:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Empty WT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Basic Empty Weight’, and press the ENT
Key to select the ‘Basic Empty Weight’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the basic empty weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering a pilot and stores weight:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Pilot & Stores’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the pilot and stores weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
The basic operating weight is calculated by adding the basic empty weight and the pilot and stores weight.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering the number of passengers:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Passengers #’ field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the number of passengers.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering the average passenger weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the passenger weight field.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the average passenger weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The total weight of passengers is calculated by multiplying the number of passengers by the average passenger
weight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering the cargo weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Cargo’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the cargo weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The ‘Zero Fuel Weight’ is calculated by adding the basic empty, pilot and stores, passenger, and cargo weights.
Entering a fuel on board weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Fuel on Board’ field.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel on board.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering fuel reserve:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Fuel Reserves’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves amount.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
254
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.
• Estimated landing weight = zero fuel weight + estimated landing fuel weight.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Estimated landing fuel weight = fuel on board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• Excess fuel weight = estimated landing fuel weight - fuel reserves weight
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of six dashes:
• Estimated landing weight
EIS
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WEIGHT CAUTION AND WARNING CONDITIONS
If the zero fuel weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel weight is
displayed in amber.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the aircraft weight is displayed
in amber.
If the estimated landing weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the estimated
landing weight is displayed in amber.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the estimated landing fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the following
values are displayed in amber:
• Estimated fuel at landing weight
• Excess fuel weight
If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in red:
AFCS
• Estimated fuel at landing weight
• Excess fuel weight
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM Prediction Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time (ARV Time)
- Arrival Date (ARV Date)
- RAIM Status
AFCS
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
Prediction
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-117 RAIM Prediction
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘Waypoint’ field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
INDEX
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
256
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘Compute RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘Waypoint’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘Compute RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM Prediction Box as follows:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ‘Computing Availability’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM Available’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
• ‘RAIM Not Available’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
AFCS
SBAS Status
SBAS Selection Box
APPENDICES
RAIM Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
Prediction)
Figure 5-118 SBAS Display - Active
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
SBAS Status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS Selection Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-119 SBAS Display - Disabled
258
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
system provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO4 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY3 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
RNAV LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach
Point (MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO4 departure, the airways, and the DBRY3 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-120 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-120 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-120 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-121.
Figure 5-121 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
260
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired
flight plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-122. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is
placed immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-122 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for
V4, Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-123.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-123 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-124.
Figure 5-124 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-124, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Select the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-125.
Figure 5-125 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
APPENDICES
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-125.
262
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-126.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-126 List of Available Exits for V4
If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-126.
j)
Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “Load?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-127.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-127 Ready to Load V4
APPENDICES
k) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-128.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-128 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ULNAZ. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate
the leg.
AFCS
c) Select the ACT Leg Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-129. Note the TOP
to ULNAZ leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-129 Comfirm Active Leg
264
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-130, the magenta arrow
in the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note
the phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active.
Since a leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling
has changed to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-130 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-131.
Figure 5-131 Turn on to Active Leg
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-132.
INDEX
Figure 5-132 Turn to Intercept V244
266
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-133, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-133 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-134.
Figure 5-134 WIZGE to LAA Leg Active
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
268
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
c) Press the Direct-to (
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-135.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-135 Direct To OPSHN
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-136.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-136 Enter VNV Altitude
APPENDICES
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-137.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-137 Enter VNV Offset Distance
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives
at an altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
270
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-138, the magenta arrow indicating
the direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the
offset distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival
procedure have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered
and maintain a track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude, then
pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it is used by the system to determine
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-138 Direct-to Active
AFCS
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) ‘Select Approach’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-139.
Figure 5-139 Procedures Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-140.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-140 List of Available Approaches
INDEX
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the RNAV LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-140.
272
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-141.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-141 List of Available Transitions
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK
is used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
h) Barometric Minimums
To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-142 Barometric Minimums Set
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
With ‘Load?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as
seen in Figure 5-143.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
i)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-143 Loaded Approach
274
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-144. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as cyan text, indicating these values are “designated”
for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
EIS
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF
cannot be designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in
Figure 5-144. Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using
the SBAS GPS altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-144 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.5 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.5 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Select the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in
Figure 5-145.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS
Knob to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude
of 10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
Figure 5-145 Adjusting the Descent
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
276
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
15) As seen in Figure 5-146, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-147. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-147, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-146 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Target Altitude
AFCS
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-147 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-148.
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-148 VDI & RVSI Showing Established Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17) Approaching the bottom of descent (BOD) as shown in Figure 5-149. Upon reaching the offset waypoint for
OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-149 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
278
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-150. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-150 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-151. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
Figure 5-151 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to FSHER. At a point 31 nm from the destination airport, the
phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the
HSI.
Annunciations for the upcoming turn and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight
progresses.
AFCS
21) The approach may be activated at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. After FSHER, ATC approves approach
activation. Manually activate the approach procedure:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Approach’ as shown in Figure 5-152.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
INDEX
Figure 5-152 Manually Activate Approach
280
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
22) The active leg is now the course direct to HABUK iaf (see Figure 5-153).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-153 Approach is Now Active
23) A descent to FALUR is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-154 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach service level is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly
and is used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI
changes to the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-155) when the final approach course becomes active.
Figure 5-155 Descending to the FAF
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues to the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope indicator,
to obtain an altitude of 8,100 feet at the FAF (Figure 5-155).
282
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
25) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,600 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-156.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-156 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
26) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the Go Around Button, or press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD, to resume
automatic waypoint sequencing through the missed approach procedure.
A Course to Altitude leg is initiated and the CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on
the HSI in Figure 5-157.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-157 Missed Approach Active
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct to is initiated to ADANE, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point
(MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-158.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-158 Direct To MAHP
284
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 9,000 feet at ADANE. A holding pattern is established at the
MAHP (ADANE) as shown in Figure 5-159.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-159 Establishing the Holding Pattern
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-160.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-160 Hold Established
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
EIS
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-161. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-161. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
APPENDICES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-161.
INDEX
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of
all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
286
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Distance &
Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current
Track
Indicator
Wind Data
EIS
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Course Deviation
Indicator
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-161 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
287
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page
288
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the G1000 are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• Flight Information Services-Broadcast (Optional)
EIS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain-SVT (Standard with SVS Option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The 69/69A SXM is a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver. The 69/69A SXM receives graphical weather
information and associated text which is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight
Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A SXM can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both
weather data and audio entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous
reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s customer service
the coded IDs unique to the installed data link receiver. The SiriusXM Weather service has a coded Data Radio
ID. The Data Radio ID must be provided to activate the weather service. This ID is in the following locations:
• The AUX - XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
AFCS
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or provide audio entertainment programming through the data link receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
1) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Info Softkey to display the Aux - XM Information Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
INDEX
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
290
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Select the Info Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Observe the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather
product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several
minutes for weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
EIS
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select to Display XM
Information page
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather data is the Map - Weather Data Link (XM) Page. This is the
only map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather products.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B) Page.
EIS
3) If the page title does not contain ‘(XM)’, it will be necessary to change the data link weather source to SiriusXM
Weather. Refer to the next procedure to change the source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD Weather
Product Age (US)
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Changing the data link weather source to SiriusXM:
APPENDICES
1) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) If necessary, turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B) Page.
3) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-3).
INDEX
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’. Weather Data Link Page title and
softkeys change to correspond to selected data link weather source.
292
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-3 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product which can be shown as a map overlay, the system displays a
weather product icon and product age. The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data
provider compiled the weather product. The product age display does not indicate the age of the information
contained within the weather product, which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The weather product icon and age may be enabled/disabled on the PFD Inset Map.
Enabling/disabling Weather Product Information on the PFD maps:
1) With the Inset Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD or METAR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the Lightning Softkey.
b) Press the Datalink Softkey to enable/disable the display of SiriusXM Lightning.
c) Press the Back Softkey.
AFCS
Enabling/disabling weather product age information on the PFD maps:
1) With the Inset Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the Wx LGND Softkey to enable/disable the display of weather product age information.
APPENDICES
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not refreshed within the Broadcast Rate intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather
product symbol instead of the product age.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
15 (69/69A SXM)
30 (69/69A SXM)
7.5
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
30
1.25
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast (CITY)
90
12
Surface Analysis (SFC)
60
12
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
120
12
Winds Aloft (WIND)
90
12
County Warnings (COUNTY)
60
5
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
60
12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
30
60
60
5
12
12
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage Not Available
TFRs
TAFs
No product image
No product image
No product image
5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
294
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
SitiusXM Lightning (LTNG)
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
METARs
+
+
+
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+*
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
City Forecast (CITY)
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+
AFCS
County Warnings (COUNTY)
TAFs
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Trip Planning Page
Weather Data Link (XM)
Page
+
Weather Information Page
Navigation Map Page
+
EIS
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map/HSI Map
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
APPENDICES
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map. Figure 6-4
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP XM LTNG CELL MOV
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
EIS
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
OFF
CURRENT
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
LEGEND
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Softkeys
INDEX
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide the ability to enable/disable the display of weather products, equivalent to using the softkeys to
enable/disable the display of weather products.
296
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-5).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-6).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-6 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-8).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-9).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-9 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
The system displays legends for weather products enabled on the Navigation Map and the Weather Data Link
(XM) Page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
INDEX
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the enabled weather products.
Or:
298
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) To remove the XM Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the
FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the MAP Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Legend Softkey (available if one or more SiriusXM Weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional information about the following SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed by panning the map
pointer over the displayed products on the map:
• METARs
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Echo Tops
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If adjusting the map range while panning is enabled, the map re-centers on the Map Pointer.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
APPENDICES
Severe
Thunderstorm
Selected with Map
Pointer
INDEX
Figure 6-10 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
NOTE: NEXRAD data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence, or icing data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
is displayed.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
300
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the Map/HSI Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown. All weather product legends can
be viewed on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, press the Legend Softkey when
NEXRAD is selected for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
APPENDICES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
EIS
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of approximately
four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of radar
reflectivity sampled within the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
APPENDICES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
INDEX
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
302
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation, regardless of
actual precipitation type.
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-14 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: The Echo Tops weather product cannot be displayed simultaneously with Cloud Tops or NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-15) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude for
selected Echo Top
AFCS
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Weather Product
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-16), press the Legend Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-16 Echo Tops Legend
304
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Weather Product
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the CLD Top Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-18), press the Legend Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-18 Cloud Tops Legend
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-19), shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning
Strikes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-19 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information on Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Select the XM LTNG Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-20), select the Legend
Softkey when SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-20 SiriusXM Lightning Legend
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
INDEX
3) Select the XM LTNG Softkey.
306
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
CELL MOVEMENT
EIS
The Cell Movement weather product (Figure 6-21) shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storm Cells
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
information for
selected Storm Cell
AFCS
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Weather Product
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement information appears with the NEXRAD weather product. On the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69 SXM or 69A SXM data link receiver is installed.
APPENDICES
In this case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Select the Cell MOV Softkey.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-22), press the Legend
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
Figure 6-22 Cell Movement Legend
EIS
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the NEXRAD
Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map Settings menu
of the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation maps:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When set to ‘On’, Cell Movement
is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement
is not displayed on navigation maps.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling the
NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the NEXRAD
Softkey.
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The National Weather Service (NWS) issues SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and
AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) for potentially hazardous weather. The NWS issues a
Convective SIGMET for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available
INDEX
APPENDICES
unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
308
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRMET for
Turbulence
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
AIRMET for
Icing conditions
EIS
SIGMET
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-24 shows sample AIRMET text.
AFCS
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend, press the Legend Softkey when SIGMETs and AIRMETs are
selected for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-24 Sample SIGMET Text
Figure 6-25 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report. A
colored flag indicates an airport with an available METAR.
Additional Information on Weather
Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR flag
selected with Map
Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-26 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, then in its original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not found
in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available.
310
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note the METAR text must be
completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
APPENDICES
Figure 6-27 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
The original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map
page. The METAR text appears in a box near the METAR flag.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the
MFD. A solid METAR flag next to a waypoint indicates METAR observations are available corresponding to
a specific waypoint in the flight plan; a hollow METAR flag indicates an off-route METAR near the flight plan
waypoint is available. If METAR text for an off-route waypoint is displayed, the system also provides the
source, distance, and direction of the off-route METAR reporting station in relation to the flight plan waypoint
at the end of the report.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an associated METAR. The METAR text will appear in the
SELECTED WAYPOINT WEATHER window below.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
5) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
To display the METAR legend (Figure 6-28) on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the Legend Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The content of the METAR determines the METAR flag color. The METAR flag is gray when the METAR
text does not contain adequate information to determine the condition.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-28 METAR Legend
312
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Navigation Database
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information (Figure 6-29) is available for current and forecast weather
conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours. Both weather products are
enabled together.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-29 Current Surface Analysis Data
AFCS
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey
label changes to show the forecast time selected.
APPENDICES
Or:
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-30), press the Legend Softkey when the
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are enabled for display.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
313
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-30 Surface Analysis Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FREEZING LEVELS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Freezing Level weather product (Figure 6-31) shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that
altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears
when it becomes available.
INDEX
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Data
314
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-32), press the Legend Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-32 Freezing Level Legend
WINDS ALOFT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-33) shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitude can be chosen in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet
MSL.
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Wind Softkey.
AFCS
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the Next or Prev Softkey
to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
315
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-34), press the Legend Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
AFCS
Figure 6-34 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-35). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
316
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Winds Aloft Data Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Headwind
Symbol
AFCS
5 knots
10 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50 knots
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
APPENDICES
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation Map
Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-37).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field. (Figure 6-38).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-38 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
318
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COUNTY WARNINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County Warning weather product (Figure 6-39) provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on severe
thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.
EIS
Flood
Warnings
Thunderstorm
Warning
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-39 County Flood Warning
Displaying County Warning information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the County Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-40), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-40 County Warnings Legend
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-41) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical
storms, and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of DD/
HH:MM.
Cyclone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
AFCS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Cyclone Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-42), press the Legend Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-42 Cyclone Legend
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the Cyclone weather product is not available unless at
INDEX
least one cyclone or tropical storm has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
320
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: The Icing weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product (Figure 6-43) shows a graphical view of the current icing
environment. Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific
to aircraft type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time
of the analysis.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying the Icing weather product:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Select the Next or PREV Softkey to
cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Light Icing Potential
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Moderate Icing
Potential
APPENDICES
Figure 6-43 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-44), press the Legend Softkey when Icing is enabled for
display.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
321
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-44 Icing Potential Legend
EIS
TURBULENCE
NOTE: The Turbulence weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as the NEXRAD weather
product.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Turbulence weather product (Figure 6-45) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying the Turbulence weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the TURB Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selection.
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet
322
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-46), press the Legend Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-46 Turbulence Legend
EIS
PIREPS AND AIREPS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) (Figure 6-47) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots.
When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required
to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing
conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
A similar type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically provide AIREPs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIREP
AFCS
Urgent PIREP
PIREP selected with
Map Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-47 PIREPs and AIREPS on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Decoded PIREP Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Original PIREP
Text
Figure 6-48 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
APPENDICES
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-49), press the Legend Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
enabled for display.
INDEX
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-49 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
324
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS (TFRS)
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas
where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security,
law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. The FAA may issue TFRs at any time,
and TFR information displayed on the system is only intended to supplement TFR information obtained from
official sources including Flight Service Stations (FSS), and Air Traffic Control facilities.
EIS
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR product is not available or has expired, the system
displays ‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Information for
selected TFR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-50 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page or Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
325
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-51 Full Text for Selected TFR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
AFCS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-53).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-54).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (‘Off’ or range settings).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
326
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-54 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 FIS-B WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Garmin GTX 345R is a Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). It receives Flight Information Services
- Broadcast (FIS-B) weather data from a network of UAT ground-based transceivers (GBTs). The system displays
FIS-B graphical weather information and associated text on the Weather Data Link Page and on navigation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FIS-B weather data reception requires the aircraft being within range and line-of-sight of an operating GBT
broadcasting FIS-B weather data. Reception may be affected by factors including altitude or terrain.
Reception of FIS-B weather data occurs automatically without any pilot action. FIS-B broadcasts provide
weather data in a repeating cycle which may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather
data. Therefore, not all available weather data may be available immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
USING FIS-B WEATHER PRODUCTS
The primary map for viewing FIS-B Weather data is the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page in the Map Page
Group.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B or XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) If the page title displays a weather data link weather source other than ‘FIS-B’, such as ‘XM’, proceed to the
following steps to change the data link weather source.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Display FIS-B Weather’ and press the ENT Key. The page title will display
‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ to indicate FIS-B is now the selected data link weather source.
APPENDICES
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which includes
all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
328
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Product Ages
for SIGMET and AIRMET
Weather Products.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-55 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page with SIGMETs/AIRMETs Displayed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When a FIS-B weather product is active on a map, the age of the data is displayed on the screen to the right
of the product symbol (Figure 6-55). The age of the product is based on the time difference between when
the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are transmitted at specific
intervals (defined in the Broadcast Rate column in Table 6-4).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time intervals (see Table 6-4), the
data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent
with FIS-B broadcast data. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
displayed changes to yellow. The system displays dashes instead of a product age when a product has expired.
If a weather product is not available or has not been received, the system displays ‘N/A’ instead of a product age.
AFCS
Table 6-4 shows the FIS-B weather product symbols, the expiration times, and broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which FIS-B GBTs broadcast new signals that may or may not contain new weather
data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the UAT.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Product
Symbol
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
90
5
90
10
90
10
60
5
EIS
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
No Radar Coverage
no product image
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
no product image
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
no product image
10
Table 6-4 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-5 shows which FIS-B weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
330
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
+
+
+
+
PIREPs
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
+*
+
TFRs
+
Winds Aloft* (WIND)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
METARs
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Weather Data Link
(XM) Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Navigation Map Page
+
EIS
+
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
FIS-B Weather Product
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD Maps
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* Winds Aloft information appears inside the VSD Inset Window on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-5 FIS-B Weather Product Display Maps
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure
6-56) shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. When a weather product is
enabled for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIG/AIR
NEXRAD
METAR
Legend
More WX
US
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RGNL
US/RGNL
Wind
Back
PIREPS
EIS
Wind Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
Press the Back Softkey
to move up one level.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and Next Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft
altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
Off
1000
1500
2000
3000
6000
9000
Next
Legend
Back
PREV
Off
12000
15000
18000
24000
30000
34000
Next
Legend
Back
PREV
Off
39000
45000
53000
Next
Legend
Back
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-56 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Weather Product Softkeys
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing FIS-B weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-57).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-58).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-59).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
332
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-59 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Weather Group
Figure 6-58 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-60).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
333
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-60 Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-61 Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-60).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
AFCS
5) If restoring an individual weather product setting to its default value, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
desired field to restore.
6) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Turn the large FMS Knob if needed to highlight ‘Restore Selection Default’ (to restore only the highlighted field)
or ‘Restore All Defaults’ (to restore all products within the selected product group to their default settings), and
press the ENT Key.
334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If multiple data link weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in Table 6-6 will result in identical settings for all services.
FIS-B Weather Product
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar Coverage
Not Available
EIS
Not Available
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SiriusXM Weather Product
and Softkey
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar
Coverage
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SiriusXM Lightning
(XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-6 Weather Data Link Map Settings Shared for Multiple
Weather Data Link Sources
When a FIS-B weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the weather product information
box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD Inset Map.
Displaying/removing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
AFCS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active FIS-B
weather products displayed on that page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) To remove the Legend Window, select the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
EIS
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the Legend Softkey (available if one or more FIS-B weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, select the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Additional information about METARs or TFRs can be displayed by panning over a METAR flag or TFR on
the map:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
Information for
selected TFR
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
INDEX
Figure 6-62 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
336
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for
maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AFCS
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-63 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display on the same map.
When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display precedence where data is available,
and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional NEXRAD coverage area.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
EIS
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey. Each selection cycles though a coverage option as the softkey name changes (US,
RGNL, or US/RGNL.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the Navigation Map Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’ (regional), or ‘Combined’,
then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects the PFD maps.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white hashed boundary
rectangle encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed.
The system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
INDEX
APPENDICES
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
338
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No radar coverage
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-64 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-65), select the Legend Softkey
when the NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No radar coverage
APPENDICES
Figure 6-65 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
Reflectivity
EIS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional version
of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected within that area.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
AFCS
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
APPENDICES
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
INDEX
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is shown as long as any portion of it is issued within the selected coverage
area of the Connext Data Request.
340
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRMET for
Mountain
Obscuration
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRMET for
Turbulence
EIS
AIRMET for Surface
Winds
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-66 SIGMET/AIRMET Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-67 shows sample SIGMET text.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-67), select the Legend Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-67 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: The system will begin to display METAR flags as it receives reports; however it may take approximately
ten minutes for all available METAR and TAF data to be received over a FIS-B broadcast.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Aviation Routine Weather Reports or METARs typically contain current information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect routine hourly observations. An Aviation Selected Special Report or SPECI includes
the code “SPECI” in the report, and may be issued if critical information has changed after the issuance of a
METAR. The system displays colored flags at airports with report(s) available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Original text
for selected
METAR
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR
Flag Selected
with Map
Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-68 METARs on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
APPENDICES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are predications of expected weather conditions for an area within
five statute miles of the center of an airport’s runway complex. The National Weather Service issues scheduled
TAFs four times each day, and additional amended TAFs if conditions warrant. TAFs typically span a forecast
period of 24 hours, but may be scheduled for a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility,
significant weather phenomena, and sky conditions using METAR codes.
INDEX
METAR and TAF text are available on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, appears only in its original text.
342
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Decoded METAR
Text
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original TAF Text
APPENDICES
Figure 6-69 METAR and TAF Information on WPT - Weather Information Page
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an offroute METAR is available near the waypoint.
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected
Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page (Figure 6-70), select the Legend
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the METAR text does not contain adequate classification information.
Figure 6-70 METAR Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WINDS AND TEMPERATURES ALOFT
The Winds and Temperatures Aloft weather product (Figure 6-71) shows the predicted temperature, wind
speed and direction at selected altitudes. Winds and temperatures aloft are available in various altitudes
between 1,000 feet and 53,000 feet MSL.
AFCS
Displaying Winds Aloft information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Wind Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the softkey for the desired altitude. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle through the altitude softkeys.
A cyan indication appears on the Wind Softkey to show the selected winds aloft altitude.
344
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-71 Winds Aloft Weather Product with 9,000 Feet Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-72), select the Legend Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
AFCS
Figure 6-72 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available in the VSD Inset Window on the Navigation Map
Page (Figure 6-73). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to
aircraft speed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
345
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Track Mode
Boundary of VSD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Winds Aloft
information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-73 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data in the VSD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-7.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
APPENDICES
10 knots
50 knots
INDEX
Table 6-7 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the VSD (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the Inset Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press
the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD Inset Window is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in the VSD:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Settings highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-74).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the VSD Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-75).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Winds’ (Figure 6-76).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-74 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-75 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Figure 6-76 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
PIREP selected with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Urgent PIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-77 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP text is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note
the original text may contain additional information not shown in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page.
348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PIREP Age in
Hours + Minutes
Decoded PIREP Text
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Original PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-78 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP legend (Figure 6-79), select the Legend Softkey when PIREPs are selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the report type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-79 PIREPs Weather Product Legend
TFRS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
In the United States, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including
national security, law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued
at any time, and TFR data displayed is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from
Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Information for
selected TFR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-80 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
Information Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the Information Window.
Figure 6-81 Full Text for Selected TFR
350
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for navigation maps:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Settings highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-82).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-83).
5) Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the TFR On/Off setting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-82 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-83 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-84 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status
Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
Figure 6-85 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on ADS-B Status Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
ADS-B Status Page
Item
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
Status
Message
ENABLED
DISABLED
---------------AVAILABLE
INDEX
APPENDICES
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
NOT AVAILABLE
METAR
METAR GRAPHICAL
AWAITING DATA
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
REGIONAL NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT
Description
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No data received from the GTX 345R UAT.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is not
receiving the FIS-B weather service.
The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the weather
product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
Table 6-8 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
352
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
G1000 Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and
obstacles. Do not confuse Terrain Proximity with the optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B
(TAWS-B). TAWS-B is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not
provide caution or warning annunciations or voice alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays
when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and
obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance
from terrain and obstacles.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
AFCS
The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-86 and Table 6-9 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
EIS
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-86 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Table 6-9 Terrain Proximity Obstacle Symbols and Colors
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal map page for viewing Terrain Proximity information.
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity Page
APPENDICES
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey until REL is shown to display terrain and obstacle data.
INDEX
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-90).
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
354
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain information can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized
by Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-87).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-88).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-89).
• Terrain Display – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-87 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-02130-00 Rev. C
INDEX
Figure 6-88 Navigation Map Page Setup
Menu
Figure 6-89 Navigation Map Page Setup
Menu, Map Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-90 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
AFCS
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s
current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can
be displayed for reference.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
356
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Orientation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-91 Terrain Proximity Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD) TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Vertical Situation Display (VSD), which includes a profile of terrain and obstacles in an
inset window on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. Although the VSD does not display TAWS alerts and
potential impact areas, the VSD does use many of the same colors and symbols as TAWS to depict relative terrain
and obstacles within the VSD. Refer to the TAWS discussion for more information about relative terrain and
obstacle color correlation and symbols.
Enabling/Disabling the Vertical Situation Display (VSD):
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the Inset Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the VSD Softkey to enable or disable the VSD.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
The same controls which enable/disable the display of relative terrain and obstacles on the Navigation Map Page
also control the display of this information in the VSD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling VSD Relative Terrain on the Navigation Map (when VSD is enabled):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
AFCS
3) Select the Terrain Softkey. Each selection cycles though an option displayed in cyan: Off (disables terrain), Topo
(to show topographical data) or REL (to show relative terrain).
VSD DISPLAY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the VSD is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown along a
vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally along
the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon
the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within
a predefined width along the aircraft track between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range.
The predefined width is determined by the flight phase, as annunciated on the HSI, and is widest during enroute
or oceanic phases. Refer to the Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVT, or TAWS-B discussions for more information
about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
358
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Total Profile View Width
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Phase
EIS
Table 6-10 Profile View Width Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The forward looking swath of terrain is based on the selected VSD Mode, annunciated in the top-left corner
of the VSD Inset Window. In Flight Plan Mode, the contour follows the active flight plan, and if no active flight
plan is present, the VSD Inset Window displays ‘Flight Plan Not Available’. In Track Mode, the contour is based
on the aircraft ground track. In Auto Mode, the contour is based on the active flight plan, when available,
otherwise, it is based on the ground track.
Selecting a VSD Mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Inset Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the VSD Softkey displaying the VSD mode in cyan. Each press of the softkey cycles through a mode
selection: FPL (flight plan), TRK (track), or Auto.
AFCS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the VSD is adjusted
to match the distance shown on the map range arc, down to one nautical mile. If the Navigation Map range is
adjusted below one nautical mile, the VSD range remains at one nautical mile. When Navigation Map range is
adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from
the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the VSD; only an outline of the terrain will be displayed
in black in the VSD Inset Window. Refer to the TAWS discussions for more information about displaying terrain
or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map Range
Profile
View Path
Enabled
Terrain Enabled Icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain Legend
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-92 VSD on the Navigation Map Page with Relative Terrain Information
TRACK MODE BOUNDARY
AFCS
The Track Mode Boundary represents the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the VSD. The boundary is
shown as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page and is only available when the VSD is enabled in Track
Mode. White range markers both edges of the Track Mode Boundary rectangle match the range markers along
the distance scale inside the VSD Inset Window whenever the profile range is at least four nautical miles (or 7.5
km if configured for metric units).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Track Mode Boundary may be enabled/disabled, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile Path
is removed from map display can be changed.
360
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the Track Mode Boundary display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-93).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘VSD’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-94).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-95).
EIS
• TRK Mode BNDRY – Enables/disables the display of the Track Mode Boundary and sets maximum range at
which Track Mode Boundary is shown.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-95 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 TERRAIN-SVT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
EIS
area.
NOTE: Terrain-SVT is included with the Synthetic Vision option. If the TAWS-B option is also installed,
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B will take precedence over Terrain-SVT.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVT is a terrain awareness system included with the Synthetic Vision option. Terrain-SVT provides
visual annunciations and voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain and obstacles relevant to
the projected flight path. For detailed information regarding the Synthetic Vision option, refer to the Flight
Instruments section.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain-SVT does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and obstacles. Do not confuse Terrain-SVT with a Terrain
Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified.
Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to
assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles and provides additional alerts.
Terrain-SVT does not provide the following:
AFCS
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
• Descent to 500 Feet Voice Callout Alert (VCO)
Terrain-SVT requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
APPENDICES
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
Terrain-SVT displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
INDEX
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
362
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system’s GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above
mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL
altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
EIS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVT
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVT DATA
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVT uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-96 and Tables 6-11, 6-12 and 6-13 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Figure 6-96 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVT
Projected Flight Path
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude Red Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
Obstacle Location
APPENDICES
100 ft Threshold
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Yellow obstacle
is between
ft and
Terrain
is between100
100 feet
and 1000 ft below the
Yellow
aircraft altitude1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
INDEX
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVT Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Figure 6-97 In-Air Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft
altitude
EIS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVT Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
Potential Impact
Area Examples
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Warning
or
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
or
Table 6-13 Terrain-SVT Potential Impact Areas with Annunciations
AFCS
The Map - Terrain-SVT Page (Figures 6-101 and 6-102) is the principal map page for viewing Terrain-SVT
information. Terrain-SVT information can be displayed on the following maps as an additional reference:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVT Page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey until REL is shown to display terrain and obstacle data.
APPENDICES
When Terrain-SVT is enabled on maps other than the Terrain-SVT Page, the system shows a status icon is to
indicate that the feature is enabled for display. A legend for Terrain-SVT terrain colors will accompany the icon
on Navigation, Trip Planning, and Flight Plan Pages (Figure 6-100) . The legend appears without the status
icon on the Terrain-SVT Page.
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
364
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map settings chosen on the Navigation Map Page affect the map settings used on other maps and pages
(except the Terrain-SVT Page). The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-97).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-98).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-99).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Terrain Display – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-97 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-98 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Figure 6-99 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVT PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Terrain-SVT Page (Figures 6-100 and 6-101) is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact
point data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports,
VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of
the aircraft intersect, the system automatically reduces the map range, if necessary, to emphasize the closest
potential impact point on the Terrain-SVT Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading-up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable
with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arc).
EIS
Displaying the Terrain-SVT Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVT Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVT Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Orientation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
AFCS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-100 Terrain-SVT Page
366
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN-SVT ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system issues alerts when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within the Terrain-SVT software.
Terrain-SVT alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, the system displays a visual annunciation and issues a voice alert. Table 6-14 shows Terrain-SVT alert
types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
During an alert, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVT Alert Annunciation appears to
the left of the Selected Altitude window on the PFD, and in the terrain annunciation window on the MFD on
pages with Terrain display enabled. If the Terrain-SVT Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears
on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVT Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pop-up
Alert
Alert Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-101 Terrain-SVT Alert Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Icon
INDEX
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-102 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVT Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-14 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
AFCS
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of the
projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground
speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway
along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes narrower until
the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
368
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
600
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
500
400
300
200
EIS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
100
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
25
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
30
Figure 6-103 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends. When
Terrain-SVT alerts are manually inhibited, the annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the MFD
terrain annunciation window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-104 Terrain-SVT Alerting Disabled (Terrain-SVT Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVT alerting:
AFCS
1) Select the Terrain-SVT Page.
2) Press the Inhibit Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVT (choice dependent on current state).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain’ or ‘Enable Terrain’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
While Terrain-SVT alerting is manually inhibited (or the system is unavailable or has failed), the system may
display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, Terrain-SVT conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert
is issued at test completion.
Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System
Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVT Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System Test Pass
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVT operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
None
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
Voice Alert
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-15 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
370
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS-B information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS-B is intended only to
enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed if the aircraft is out of the installed terrain database coverage area.
EIS
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS-B databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is an optional feature to increase situational
awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed
alerts and warnings are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B requires the following information to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151b.
However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain
inaccuracies.
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than 200 feet above
ground level, AGL) present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The system dynamically adjusts these
colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the aircraft
altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown on the TAWS
On-Ground Legend shown in Figure 6-105. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain
information using red, yellow, green, and black, as shown on the TAWS In-Air Legend shown in Figure 6-106.
As the aircraft transitions from on-ground to in-air, or from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain
momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. If a TAWS alert occurs, the relative terrain colors transition
to the TAWS In-Air Legend if in the TAWS On-Ground Legend was shown in order to provide the flight crew
with the most information possible.
TAWS On-Ground Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS In-Air Legend
Figure 6-105 Terrain Icon and Legend
During an alert, the system shows potential impact areas over terrain or obstacles using bright yellow (caution)
or bright red (warning) on navigation maps and on the TAWS-B Page.
AFCS
The colors and symbols in Figure 6-106 and Tables 6-16 and 6-17 and 6-18 represent terrain, obstacles, and
potential impact areas.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
APPENDICES
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
INDEX
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-106 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS
372
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
Projected Flight Path
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
EIS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-16 TAWS Relative Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft
altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-17 TAWS-B Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
Alert Type
AFCS
Potential Impact
Area Examples
Example Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Warning
or
APPENDICES
Caution
or
Table 6-18 TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - TAWS-B Page is the principal map page for viewing TAWS-B information. TAWS-B information
can be also displayed on the following maps and pages as an additional reference:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• TAWS-B Page
Enabling/disabling relative terrain information on MFD navigation maps:
EIS
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the TER Softkey to cycle through terrain options. The selected mode is displayed in cyan: Off, Topo, REL.
Press the TER Softkey until ‘REL’ is displayed on the softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying relative terrain information (PFD Maps):
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Rel Ter Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled
for display and a legend for TAWS-B terrain colors are shown. The legend appears without the icon on the
TAWS-B Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
AFCS
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-107).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-108).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-109).
• Terrain Display – Selects the display of topo, relative terrain, or no terrain, and selects the maximum map
range at which terrain is shown
EIS
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-107 Navigation Map Page
Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-108 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
Figure 6-109 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact area data in relation to the
aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal page for viewing TAWS-B
information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be enabled for reference. If an obstacle
and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential
point of impact on the TAWS-B Page.
EIS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Orientation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
AFCS
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
APPENDICES
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Figure 6-110 TAWS-B Page
376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-19 shows
TAWS-B alert types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation
appears to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom left on the MFD. If the TAWS-B Page is
not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pop-up
Alert
Alert Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-111 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Potential Impact
Area
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-112 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
*
EIS
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
APPENDICES
*
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
*
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-19 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
378
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-113 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
500
Figure 6-113 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the aircraft’s projected flight
path with known terrain and obstacles in their respective databases and issues four types of alerts as either a
caution or a warning:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-114. When an RTC alert is issued, the system displays a potential impact area
on navigation maps and the TAWS-B Page.
APPENDICES
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts
are accompanied by a potential impact area on the navigation maps and the TAWS-B Page. The alert is
annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes
in Figure 6-114.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
EIS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-114 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically suppresses FLTA alerts from occurring under any of the following conditions:
• The aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination elevation and within 0.5 nm of the destination.
• The aircraft is less than 50 feet above terrain or on the ground.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The aircraft is between runway ends.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-115).
AFCS
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
INDEX
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-115 PDA Alerting Threshold
380
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used
when inhibiting TAWS-B and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS-B is inhibited,
the alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 6-116).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-116 TAWS-B Alerting Inhibited Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
EIS
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Select the Inhibit Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-B (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While TAWS-B alerting is inhibited, is unavailable, or has failed, the system may show a ‘LOW ALT’
annunciation on the PFDs if all of these conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GPS SBAS approach.
• The Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed FAF altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Refer to the Flight Instruments for more information about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
ALTITUDE VOICE CALLOUT (VCO) ALERT
AFCS
The system provides a “Five-hundred” voice alert when the aircraft descends to within 500 feet above the
terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within five nautical miles of an airport, the “Five Hundred”
voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft is more than five nautical
miles from the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain, by
comparing the aircraft’s GPS-GSL altitude to the terrain database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the VCO alert. This alert cannot be
inhibited.
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
APPENDICES
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by visual annunciations. NCR alerting is
only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
INDEX
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss (Figure 6-117) or sink rate (6-11).
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1000
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-117 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
AFCS
200
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-118 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
SYSTEM STATUS
APPENDICES
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. The system test
can also be manually initiated. A voice alert is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled
when ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
INDEX
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-120).
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-119 TAWS-B Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test pass
None
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
None
“TAWS System Test Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
APPENDICES
None
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
None
INDEX
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
TAWS TEST
AFCS
No GPS position
Voice Alert
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System Test in progress
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the system
displays the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. When the GPS signal
integrity returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the system issues the voice alert, “TAWS
Available” .
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-20 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.7 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EIS
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays TIS traffic with the symbology shown in Table 6-16.
TIS Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
AFCS
Table 6-21 TIS Traffic Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid yellow circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which traffic
is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
APPENDICES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-124) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on
which traffic can be displayed (Figure 6-120).
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
384
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic TIS is
operating:
EIS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Terrain-SVT option is installed and enabled.
See the Additional Features Section for details.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Not
Reporting
Altitude
TA Off Scale
Banner
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic System
Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-120 TIS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
APPENDICES
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information on the Inset Map or HSI Map.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-121).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-122).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-123).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-121 Navigation Map Page
Menu
Figure 6-122 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
386
Figure 6-123 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by
the map range rings.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
EIS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the TIS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Range
Marking
Rings
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Non-Threat
Traffic, 1200’
Above,
Descending
AFCS
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
APPENDICES
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Figure 6-124 Traffic Map Page
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AFCS
Figure 6-125 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
APPENDICES
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
INDEX
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
388
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the TNA Mute Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM STATUS
EIS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FAILED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
DATA FAILED
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
UNAVAILABLE
TIS is unavailable or out of range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-22 TIS Failure Annunciations
TIS System Failed
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Data Received
from Transponder
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-126 TIS Power-up Test Failure
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-24 for additional failure annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-23 TIS Modes
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
390
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-19).
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC RMVD
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRFC COAST
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
EIS
AGE MM:SS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
Description
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-24 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.8 GTS 800 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: Mode-S TIS is disabled when TAS installed.
NOTE: If a Garmin GTX 345R transponder is installed with this traffic system, refer to the ADS-B traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
discussion for more information about ADS-B traffic displays.
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight crew situational awareness
by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual annunciations
and voice traffic alerts to assist in visually acquiring traffic.
AFCS
The GTS 800 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders, and
up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest
threat potential can be displayed simultaneously. No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating
transponders.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
THEORY OF OPERATION
INDEX
APPENDICES
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft
while monitoring for transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative
bearing, and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The
traffic system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach
(CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual
annunciations and voice alerts.
392
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTS 800 TAS surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under
ideal conditions, the system scans transponder traffic up to 12 nm in the forward direction. The range is
somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In
areas of greater transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II)
systems are detected, the GTS 800 automatically reduces its interrogation transmitter power (and therefore
range) in order to limit potential interference from other signals.
EIS
In addition, if a 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder is installed, and the traffic system detects airborne
traffic providing 1090 MHz Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) information, the system
will display the TAS traffic using the ADS-B symbology shown in Table 6-25.
NOTE: Do not confuse this functionality with full ADS-B capability, which can provide traffic information
TAS Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
from ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and ADS-B traffic outside of the TAS/TCAS I surveillance
volume.
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-25 TAS Symbol Description
AFCS
Traffic Symbol
Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.
APPENDICES
Other Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Points
in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Table 6-26 Traffic with ADS-B Symbology (GTX 335/345 Transponder)
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the
ground.
Table 6-27 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
APPENDICES
AFCS
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A solid white rounded arrow indicates either a PA or Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional information,
but the position of the traffic is shown with degraded accuracy.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond 6 nm
that is neither a TA or PA.
INDEX
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet (Figure 6-127). When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a
minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
394
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol (Figure 6-127).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-127 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
EIS
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, a motion vector line extending beyond the
traffic symbol in the direction of the track may also be displayed when either absolute or relative motion
vectors are enabled (Figure 6-128).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-128 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional Information and Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. The system applies Level A TA sensitivity when the
groundspeed is less than 120 knots; Level B TA sensitivity applies in all other conditions.
No
B
Yes
B
No
INDEX
A
APPENDICES
Yes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A
TA Alerting Conditions
AFCS
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
Table 6-28 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
When the GTS 800 detects a new TA, the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-28). For example,
the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own
aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-129).
EIS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate
“TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
AFCS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-129 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
INDEX
Table 6-29 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
396
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
test during flight.
The GTS 800 provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-130). If the system test passes, the system announces, “TAS System Test Passed”
Otherwise the system announces, “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the traffic
system enters Standby Mode.
EIS
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
4) Press the Test Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAS Test Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-130 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OPERATION
NOTE: The traffic system automatically transitions from Standby to Operating mode eight seconds after
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
takeoff. The system also automatically transitions from Operating to Standby mode 24 seconds after
landing.
After power-up, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The system must be in Operating Mode for traffic to
be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
EIS
Selecting the OPERATE Softkey allows the traffic unit to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Selecting the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the Traffic Page, select the Standby Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key.
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the Operate Softkey.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key. The traffic unit switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Map - Traffic Map Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick
(up to 40 nm) as indicated by the map range rings.
398
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the Traffic
Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAS Operating Mode
Annunciation
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
EIS
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
Traffic Display
Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-131 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Select the TAS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
AFCS
4) Select the TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Display Mode
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic is
displayed. TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
APPENDICES
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to
2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, and rings on the map denote the ranges.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the Joystick.
•
750 ft (with optional ADS-B)
•
750 ft and 1500 ft (with optional ADS-B)
•
1500 FT and 0.5 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
1 nm and 2 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) The following range options are available:
400
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
• Trip Planning Page
EIS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, the system shows a traffic status icon to
indicate traffic is enabled for display (Figure 6-133).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Proximity
Advisory
Traffic Advisory
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
APPENDICES
Figure 6-132 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-133).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-134).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-135).
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
EIS
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-133 Navigation Map Page
Menu
Figure 6-135 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
INDEX
Figure 6-134 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
402
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Traffic Map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map will appear in
heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic and optional
datalink weather information on navigation maps.
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD Inset Map:
EIS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information on the Inset Map or HSI Map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic System Test
Initiated
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
OPERATING
Operating
Traffic System Failed*
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Standby
FAIL
* See Table 6-30 for additional failure annunciations
AFCS
Table 6-29 Traffic Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-30 TAS Failure Annunciations
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-31 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
404
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.9 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Garmin GTX 345R transponder sends and receives Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast
(ADS-B) traffic information on the 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES) frequency. It receives ADS-B traffic
and data link weather information on the 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) frequency. The system
provides visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to help the pilot visually acquire potentially conflicting
traffic. This discussion covers the traffic features of the GTX transponder; refer to the Flight Information ServiceBroadcast (FIS-B) Weather section for more information about the UAT data link weather features of the GTX 345.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ADS-B is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic control system and is comprised of three segments:
ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R (Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADS-B is the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on fixed
objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail Number,
ICAO registration number, etc), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
AFCS
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
1090 ES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
Mode A/C
ATC
UAT
UAT
APPENDICES
RADAR
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
Figure 6-136 ADS-B System
INDEX
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
EIS
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking data from one link
and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground station,
and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other on 978 MHz, the ground station retransmits the data
from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because the GTX 345R transponder sends and receives ADS-B traffic reports on the 1090 ES frequency,
but only receives traffic reports on the 978 MHz UAT frequency, the presents of an ADS-R ground station is
necessary for an aircraft with only UAT-capabilities to ‘see’ the aircraft with the GTX 345R transponder.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS-B provides the bridge between the radar-based ATC system and the ADS-B-based system. When an
ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B ground station, the ground
station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is then included in the list of
aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in Secondary Surveillance
Radar coverage, and the other aircraft is also in Secondary Surveillance Radar coverage, and is transmitting
its altitude.
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
AFCS
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GTX 345R-equipped aircraft according to
the level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder
Yes*
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage, or own
aircraft is equipped with a TAS/TCAS I system and traffic is within the TAS/TCAS I surveillance range.
Table 6-32 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
INDEX
ADS-B WITH TAS
When an optional active traffic system, such as a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed and operating
with an optional GTX 345R transponder, the transponder receives traffic from the active traffic system and
attempts to match (or “correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B traffic the transponder is tracking. When a correlation
406
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
is made, the only the traffic with the most accurate information is displayed to the flight crew. Any traffic that
is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This
correlation of traffic by the transponder improves the accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the
occurrence of the same aircraft being displayed twice.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional active traffic system
providing intermittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or periodically depicted as two aircraft on
the display.
EIS
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS system discussed previously.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The transponder issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic! Two
O’clock, Low, Two Miles.”
4
4
4
5
5
Any
Any
Unavailable
Any
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
5
6
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
INDEX
8
Terminal
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
APPENDICES
Unavailable or
>2350
Any
Any
Approach
Any
Any
Vertical
Protected
Own Altitude Look-ahead
Threshold for Volume
(Feet)
time (sec)
Alert (feet)
(NM)
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
25
850
0.20
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
GPS Phase of Flight
AFCS
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Sensitivity
Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Radar Altitude (if available), Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to
adjust the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm in accordance with the following table:
Table 6-33 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-34). For example,
the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own
aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears to the right of the Airspeed Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five seconds,
and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-137).
EIS
• If the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map was already displayed, the traffic is shown on the displayed map. Otherwise
the Traffic Map is shown on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
AFCS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-137 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Table 6-34 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
INDEX
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
408
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional GTX 345R can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are
two ADS-B applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness
(SURF). The system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feed above the nearest airport.
When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
EIS
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a Traffic Map
Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to
traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for
more information about SafeTaxi displays.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic symbols
may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to be displayed
in the SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Availability for
AIRB and SURF is depicted on the AUX-ADS-B Status Page, discussed later in this section.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SURF Application On
Ground-based
vehicle
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft on the
ground
APPENDICES
Figure 6-138 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in Table 6-35. Above or below the traffic symbol is the
traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic is
climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
EIS
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-35 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
OPERATION
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map
range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
410
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRB Application On
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
EIS
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
Traffic Display
Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-139 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic.
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
2) Ensure the the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
APPENDICES
3) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
4) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the
PFDs. At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test pattern
is displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ADS-B Test Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-140 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is displayed.
TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
AFCS
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following softkeys:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
APPENDICES
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, select the Back Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
412
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey description in step 2 above):
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Absolute
Motion Vectors
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
Figure 6-141 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
413
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Relative Motion
Vectors
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-142 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
AFCS
3) Select one of the following softkeys:
•
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
Off:
Disables the display of the motion vector.
Or:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select the Duration Softkey.
INDEX
4) Select a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, select the Back Softkey to return to the Traffic Map Page.
414
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may include
the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service vehicle,
unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV)), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The first selected traffic symbol is highlighted in cyan. Additional information appears in
a window in the upper-right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
EIS
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan bracket until the selected aircraft
traffic symbol is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
500 feet and 1000 feet
•
1000 feet and 2000 feet
•
2000 feet and 1 nm
•
1 and 2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
•
AFCS
500 feet
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
•
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps. Refer to the previous TAS/TCAS I
APPENDICES
discussions for information about these additional traffic displays.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
ADS-B: TEST
TEST MODE
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B: SURF
None
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
ADS-B TRFC N/A
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
ADS-B Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-37 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-36 ADS-B Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
AFCS
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-37 Traffic Failure Annunciations
416
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA X.X ± XX ↕
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude
trend arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
EIS
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
Description
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-38 Traffic Status Annunciations
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-143 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface (SURF),
Airborne Alerts (CSA)
Status Message
Description
On
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The GTX 345R is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GTX 345R is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of a number of minutes.
Available to Run
Not Available
EIS
Fault
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Not Configured
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last Uplink
---------------Available
Not Available
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-39 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
418
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the PA-28-181 Flight Manual (FM) for information regarding the installed autopilot.
This feature is not currently integrated with the Garmin integrated avionics system.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
419
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Blank Page
420
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Wi-Fi connections
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• FliteCharts® electronic charts
• Scheduler
• AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
• Flight Data Logging
EIS
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features
on the PFD. SVT imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as
the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The AOPA and AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
AFCS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck.
SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field
of view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight
Display (PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived
from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain,
obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain
elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of
SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled
until the required data is restored.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) is integrated within SVT to provide visual and auditory
alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts
are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
422
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale is reduced from 20
degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The softkeys
are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign. The Back Softkey returns to the previous level of
softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is activated (gray
with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys
may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected
state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys is remembered by the system.
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
APPENDICES
• Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
423
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVT:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the Pathways Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
AFCS
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HDG LBL Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT Sign Softkey.
424
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT FEATURES
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Airport
Runway
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
PATHWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
APPENDICES
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Programmed
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
426
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent. When the flight plan includes
programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the selected
altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
428
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
Wind
Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
ZERO PITCH LINE
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HDG LBL Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORT SIGNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
430
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other
Runway
on Airport
AFCS
Airport
Runway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TAWS ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert
on the Inset Map and MFD Map displays. For more detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B,
refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
432
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. When employing a TAWS-B system, unlike the Inset
map and MFD moving map display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn
of potential conflict with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert.
Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the
airspeed and altitude displays.
EIS
PULL UP
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Potential
Impact
Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FIELD OF VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Settings and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to Field of View.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
434
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of View
turned on.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
436
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport
Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Detail Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time the softkey
is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Selecting the Detail All Softkey removes the taxiway
markings and airport feature labels. Selecting the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol,
and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Selecting the Detail 2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Selecting the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back
to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Settings Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Settings Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
SAFETAXI
Option
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
INDEX
Figure 8-16 Map Settings Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
438
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
EIS
SafeTaxi Database
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-17 Power-up, SafeTaxi Database
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
AFCS
SafeTaxi database has expired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
APPENDICES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the Aux - System Status page.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Press the FMS Knob Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob, Press the Details Softkey to show additional SafeTaxi database information.
The SafeTaxi database cycle number 16S3, is deciphered as follows:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16 – Indicates the year 2016
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
3 – Indicates the third issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The SafeTaxi Effective date 26–MAY–16 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi Expires
date 21–JUL–16 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi Data
AFCS
Figure 8-18 AUX - System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The Effective date appears in blue when data is current
and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The Expires date appears in blue when data
is current and in yellow when expired. Not Available appears in blue in the Region field if SafeTaxi data is
not available on the database card. An expired SafeTaxi database is not disabled and will continue to function
indefinitely.
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The Database
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
INDEX
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
440
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Effective date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the effective date,
the Effective date appears in yellow and the Expires date appears in blue. The Expires date is the revision date
for the next database cycle. Not Available indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card or no
database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 FLITECHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Airport Diagrams
Off-Scale
Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Areas
APPENDICES
Off-Scale
Areas
INDEX
Off-Scale
Area
Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
442
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, selecting the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Chart, Info, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and Go
Back. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
EIS
Selecting the Go Back Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: All, Fit WDTH, Full SCN, and Back.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the CHRT Opt Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-21 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, select the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Charts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-22 Option Menus
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner NO AVAILABLE CHARTS appears on the screen.
The NO AVAILABLE CHARTS banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-23 NO AVAILABLE CHARTS Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner
INDEX
When a chart is not available by selecting the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
444
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the
Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
Selecting a chart:
EIS
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, select the Charts Softkey.
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Select the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
AFCS
Selecting the Chart Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
445
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-25 Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
Selecting the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If
the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect.
INDEX
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the INFO
Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
446
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart.
Selecting the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Selecting the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Selecting the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
Selecting Additional Information:
EIS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, select the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Selecting the Go Back Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CHART OPTIONS
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Selecting the All Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
Selecting the Fit WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
AFCS
Selecting the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the Full Screen and Color Scheme Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Color Scheme Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
EIS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays
the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
INDEX
FliteCharts Database
Figure 8-26 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
448
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Power-up Page Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
EIS
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
Table 8-2 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’
in yellow, indicates charts are still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the Aux - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database Region, Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue
or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within the
current subscription period.
AFCS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts Expires date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the Disables date. After the disable date the Charts Softkey label
appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
15 – Indicates the year 2015
The FliteCharts database cycle number such as 1505, is deciphered as follows:
05 – Indicates the fifth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts Effective date 07–MAY–15 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts Expires date 04–JUN–15 is the last date that this database is current.
EIS
The Disabled date 01–DEC–15 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The other three possible Aux - System Status page conditions are shown here. The Expires date, in yellow, is
the revision date for the next database cycle. The Disables date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle is
no longer viewable. Region and Cycle Not Available in blue, indicate that FliteCharts database is not available
on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-27 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Database Status
450
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is
viewed on the Airport Information Page by selecting the Info Softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information for the airport closest to
the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, select the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-28 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
APPENDICES
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
451
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Directory Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-29 Power-up, Airport Directory Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
Table 8-3 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the Aux - System Status page.
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number 16D3, is deciphered as follows:
16 – Indicates the year 2016
INDEX
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
3 – Indicates the second issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
452
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airport Directory Effective date 26–May–16 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory Expires date 21–JUL–16 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Directory
Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-30 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The Effective date appears in blue when data
is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The Expires date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired. Not Available appears in blue in the Region field if Airport
Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory database is not disabled and
will continue to function indefinitely.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 WIFI CONNECTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPA-Enterprise
and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive portals, or other elements
that require user credentials, including a user name and password or a redemption or access code; or require
action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
The optional GDL 59 Data Link provides a high speed IEEE 802.11g WiFi data link between the aircraft and a
ground computer network while the aircraft is on the ground and located within range of the network.
Control and monitoring of Wi-Fi functions are accomplished through the Aux-Maintenance Wi-Fi Setup Page.
EIS
Viewing the WiFi Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aux-Maintenance WiFi Setup Page.
Setting up a new WiFi connection:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Avail Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the Available Networks
window. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as security requirements and whether the network
has been saved in the system’s memory.
INDEX
Figure 8-31 Available Wi-Fi Networks
454
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) If necessary, select the Rescan Softkey to have the system scan again for available networks.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network.
EIS
5) Select the Connect Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect to Selected Network’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If the network is secured, a window will be displayed in order to enter the necessary passcode. Use the FMS
Knobs to enter the desired alpha numeric characters. Select the CapsLock Softkey to enter upper case letters.
If there is no security associated with the network, proceed to step 9.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key again.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) The Save Settings window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘Save Connection’.
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make re-connection easier at a later time.
Connecting the selected network without saving:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to highlight ‘Connect’.
AFCS
b) Press the ENT Key.
Saving and connect the selected network:
a) Press the ENT Key. A checkmark is placed in the checkbox and the cursor moves to the airport field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter an airport identifier to be associated with the saved network. This aids in
identifying the network later in the event of duplicate network names.
c) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to ‘Connect’.
APPENDICES
d) Press the ENT Key again to connect to the selected network.
Editing a saved network:
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the Auto Connect checkbox. When a checkmark is
present, the system will automatically connect to the network when within range.
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Select the Edit Softkey. The cursor now appears in the Connection Settings window.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘Save’ is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key.
Disconnecting a Wi-Fi network:
EIS
Select the DISCNCT Softkey.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting a saved Wi-Fi network:
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the Delete Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
456
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link
Receiver, not the GDL 69.
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the Aux - XM Radio page.
4) Select the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
APPENDICES
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Select the Lock Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Weather
Products
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info
Softkey
Figure 8-32 XM Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
AFCS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed Aux - XM Information Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Select the Radio Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
458
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active
Channels
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Channel
List
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Categories
Field
Volume
Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-33 XM Radio Page
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
AFCS
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the Channel Softkey.
2) Select the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the CH – Softkey.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
APPENDICES
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the Channel Softkey.
2) Select the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Select the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CATEGORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Select the Category Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Select the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
EIS
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AFCS
Figure 8-34 Categories List
PRESETS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
selecting the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the
channel list for the Presets category.
APPENDICES
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, select the Presets
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 - Preset 5).
INDEX
Setting a preset channel number:
3) Select any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
2) Select the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and again to access the
last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Selecting the More Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset
channels.
4) Select the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
460
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Select Presets to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select More to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Select Set to
Save Each
Preset Channel
Figure 8-35 Accessing and Selecting SiriusXM Preset Channels
EIS
Selecting the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
VOLUME
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by selecting the Volume Softkey, which
brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, select the Volume Softkey.
2) Select the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or select the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is selected, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-36 Volume Control
SiriusXM Radio volume may also be adjusted on each passenger headset.
AFCS
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the Mute Softkey to mute the audio. Select the Mute Softkey again to unmute the audio.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-37 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the Aux - Utility Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
APPENDICES
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time messages, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
462
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the Aux - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting,
the Messages Softkey label changes to Advisory. Pressing the Messages Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to Messages when pressed. Pressing the
Messages Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-38 PFD Alerts Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.8 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the G1000 system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the Aux-Utility Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the G1000 system is capable of logging.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Date
• Time
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Vertical speed (fpm)
AFCS
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• OAT (degrees C)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• True airspeed (knots)
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
APPENDICES
• Ground Speed (kts)
• Autopilot On/Off
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• HSI source
• Selected course
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• GPS fix
• GPS horizontal alert limit
• GPS vertical alert limit
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• CDI deflection
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Turbine RPM
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Torque
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
INDEX
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
464
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Local Date
YYMMDD
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
log_130210_104506_KIXD.csv
EIS
Figure 8-39 Log File Format
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Data logging status can be monitored on the Aux-Utility Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.9 CONNEXT SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The mobile device must be ‘paired’ with the G1000 in order to use the various functions. Pairing is accomplished
by first placing the G1000 in pairing mode by displaying the Connext Setup Page. The G1000 is ‘discoverable’
whenever this page is displayed. The pairing operation is completed from the mobile device and the Garmin Pilot
application. See the device Bluetooth pairing instructions and the connection instructions in the Garmin Pilot
application.
The Connext Setup Page allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth
connection between the G1000 and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
EIS
Viewing the Connext Setup Page
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Connext Setup page.
Changing the Bluetooth Name
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Bluetooth Name’ field.
3) Enter the desired name by using the large FMS Knob to select the character field, and the small FMS Knob
select the desired alphanumeric character for that field.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is removed and the new name is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Flight Plan Importing from Garmin Pilot
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Flight Plan Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Enabling/Disabling WiFi Database Importing from Garmin Pilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘WiFi Database Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
466
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Reconnection of a Specific Paired Device
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. Selecting ‘Enabled’ allows the G1000 to automatically
connect to a previously paired device when detected.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Remove a Specific Paired Device from the List of Paired Devices:
EIS
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
3) Press the Remove Softkey. A confirmation screen is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’.
5) Press the ENT Key to remove the device from the list of paired devices.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
EIS
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 4.9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
AFCS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
468
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDL 59/69/69A SXM TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the Aux - System Status Page for GDL 59,
or GDL 69/69A SXM status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the Aux - System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aux - System Status Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-40 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Ensure the installed Data Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver has an active subscription or account
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver or
Iridium Transceiver
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
GDL 69/69A SXM
Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks because that would prevent SiriusXM
radio from being heard
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message
Message Location
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD)
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
WAITING FOR DATA...
SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
Table 8-4 GDL 69/69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
470
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
The Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• CAS Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based on alert
levels described in the following section. The CAS Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical
Speed Indicator. All Crew Alerting System (CAS) annunciations can be displayed simultaneously in the CAS
Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are
not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
EIS
• Messages Window: The Messages Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages.
Pressing the Messages Softkey displays the Messages Window. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time
removes the Messages Window from the display. When the Messages Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can
be used to scroll through the alert message list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the Messages Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The Messages Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (Warning,
Caution, or Advisory). By pressing the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged. The
softkey label then returns to Messages. If alerts are still present, the Messages label is displayed in white with
black text. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is
supplied by a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the System Annunciations Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)
System
Annunciation
(Amber ‘X’)
AFCS
CAS
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Messages
Window
APPENDICES
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 Alerting System
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
• Audio Alerting System: The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. Should
the #1 GIA 63W fail, audio and voice alerts are not generated. The annunciation tone may be tested from the
AUX - System Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Select the Ann Test Softkey.
Or:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Press to Test
Annunciation Tone
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure A-2 System Status Page, Annunciation Tone Testing
472
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for corrective pilot actions.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Any CAS messages that are generated when the system is first powered on are considered already
acknowledged. They do not flash or trigger the Master Warning or Master Caution.
EIS
The Alerting System uses three alert levels. Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory)
and sorted by order of appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its
urgency and on required action:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Crew Alerting System (CAS) Window is located on the right side of the PFD. Warning messages cannot
be scrolled through and remain at the top of the CAS display. The scroll bar appears if more caution and
advisory messages exist than can be displayed at once or if messages have been scrolled off the display. The
CAS softkeys also become available.
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Warning: This level of alert requires immediate attention. When a new warning CAS message appears in the
CAS Window, it flashes (inversely red on white) in conjunction with the Warning Softkey (see Figure A-3) and
is accompanied by a repeating triple chime. Pressing the Warning Softkey acknowledges all flashing warning
messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once acknowledged, warning messages are shown in red text and are
displayed until the issue is corrected. Warning voice alerts repeat continuously until acknowledged by pressing
the Warning Softkey.
AFCS
Caution: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention. When a new caution message appears in the CAS Window, it is shown in black on amber inverse
video in conjunction with the Caution Softkey (see Figure A-3) and is accompanied by a double chime.
Pressing the Caution Softkey Indicator acknowledges all amber messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once
acknowledged, caution messages are displayed until the issue is corrected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Advisory: This level of alert provides general information. When a new white advisory appears on the CAS
display, it is shown in black on white inverse video in conjunction with the Advisory Softkey (see Figure A-3)
and may be accompanied by a single chime.
APPENDICES
Some CAS messages can be display in more than one alert level group. For example, a message might
display as both a warning and a caution, but cannot appear more than once at any given time (unless the CAS
is being tested). If the received signals justify multiple priorities for a certain message, the message is displayed
for the higher priority condition. When graduating to a higher priority, the message flashes and requires
new acknowledgment. When degrading to a lower priority condition, the message moves to the top of the
appropriate grouping, but does not require new acknowledgment.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAS
Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure A-3 CAS Message Prioritization
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure A-4 Softkey Annunciation (Message Softkey Labels)
474
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CAS ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations are configured specifically for the Piper Archer. Red annunciation window text
signifies warnings, amber signifies cautions, and white signifies advisories. See the POH for recommended pilot
actions.
DISPLAY INHIBITS
Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during the following conditions:
EIS
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., L FUEL QTY warning and L FUEL
QTY caution) only the higher alert level is displayed.
If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically
inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.
Description
Alternator failure
Left fuel quantity in warning range
Right fuel quantity in warning range
Starter motor energized when engine is running
Audio Alert
Repeating Triple Chime
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Warning Messages
ALTR FAIL
L FUEL QTY
R FUEL QTY
START ENGD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WARNING ANNUNCIATIONS
CAUTION ANNUNCIATIONS
Description
Air conditioning condenser door is open
Left fuel quantity in caution range
Right fuel quantity in caution range
Pitot heat failure
Pitot heat selected OFF
Audio Alert
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Caution Messages
AC DOOR OPEN*
L FUEL QTY
R FUEL QTY
PITOT HEAT FAIL
PITOT HEAT OFF
Double Chime
AFCS
* Optional
ADVISORY ANNUNCIATIONS
Audio Alert
None
Single Chime
APPENDICES
Description
Air conditioning condenser door is open
Avionics cooling fan is inoperative
Emergency power in use
Fuel imbalance (left vs. right tank quantity)
Maintenance Mode has been activated
MFD display fan is inoperative.
PFD1 display fan is inoperative
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Advisory Messages
AC DOOR OPEN*
AV FAN FAIL
EMERG BAT ON
FUEL IMBAL
MAINT MODE
MFD FAN FAIL
PFD FAN FAIL
* Optional
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to initialize. All windows
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
EIS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red or amber ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated
with the failed data (refer to Figure A-5 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GSU 75 ADAHRS
GSU 75 ADAHRS
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
or
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics
Unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GTX 335/345
Transponder
or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
AFCS
GSU75 ADAHRS
Figure A-5 System Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the AUX - System Status Page (Figure A-2). Active LRUs
are indicated by green check marks; failed by red or amber ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service
center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
APPENDICES
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
476
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Comment
System Annunciation
Comment
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
ADAHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from the
ADAHRS.
EIS
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
ADAHRS.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Air Data, Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from the
ADAHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid ISA information from the
ADAHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from the
ADAHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Various Red X
Indications
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the
ADAHRS.
ADAHRS calibration incomplete
or configuration module
failure.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
ADAHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
ADAHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table A-1 System Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or an
LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red amber ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the System Annunciation section.
NOTE: This section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed by the
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
Message Advisory
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
AHRS1 CAL – AHRS1 calibration version
error. Srvc req’d.
AHRS1 CONFIG – AHRS1 config error.
Config service req’d.
Comments
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SERVICE – AHRS1 Magneticfield model needs update.
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
The ADAHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The ADAHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check POH
limitations. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
478
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
The ADAHRS is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
The ADAHRS is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
The ADAHRS calibration version error. The system should be serviced.
ADAHRS configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The ADAHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The ADAHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The ADAHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The ADAHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The ADAHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The COM1 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1. COM1 may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced
COM2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM2. COM2 may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM2. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM2 MANIFEST – COM2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
A failure has been detected in carbon monoxide detector has been detected. The
detector may still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
A failure in the carbon monoxide detector has been detected. The system should be
serviced.
The COM1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced
COM1 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
EIS
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
CO DET SRVC – The carbon
monoxide detector needs service.
CO DET FAIL – The carbon monoxide
detector is inoperative.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM1 MANIFEST – COM1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
Comments
APR INACTV – Approach is not active. The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
AUDIO MANIFEST - Audio software
The GDC 74B has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COPILOT RADIOS MUTED – Copilot
The copilot radios are set on mute.
radios are muted.
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or types installed.
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Crossfill is off. Check the AUX-System Status Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-System Status Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or types installed. Check
mismatch.
the AUX-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AUXSystem Status Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or types
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-System Status Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Check
mismatch.
the AUX-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AUXSystem Status Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DIG GMA1 MANIFEST – DIG GMA
The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
1 software mismatch, communication serviced.
halted.
DME CHECK RANGE – DME range
A failure or disagreement has been detected in a DME receiver. Check position
disagreement. Check position sensors. sensors.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63W has failed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
480
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
GDL 59 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
A fault has been detected in the GDL 59. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A fault has been detected in the GDL 59 router. The system should be serviced.
A fault has been detected in the GDL 59. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDL 69/69A SXM configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69/69A or GDL 69/69A SXM. The receiver is
unavailable. The system should be serviced.
The GDL 69/69A SXM has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved ADAHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GIA1 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
The GIA1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The GIA1 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
The ADAHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
EIS
GDL69 MANIFEST – GDL software
mismatch, communication halted.
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GEA1 MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
Comments
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The receiver may still be
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The receiver may still be
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDL59 RTR FAIL – The GDL 59 router
has failed.
GDL59 SERVICE – GDL 59 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GDC1 MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GDL59 CONFIG – GDL 59 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL59 FAIL – GDL 59 has failed.
The GIA1 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GMA1 AUX MANIFEST – GMA 1 AUX
software mismatch, communication
halted.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GMU1 MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GRS1 MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GTS CONFIG – GTS config error.
Config service req’d.
GTS MANIFEST – GTS software
mismatch, communication halted.
482
Comments
The GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to
operating temperature.
The GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be serviced
when possible.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
The ADAHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GTS 800 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GTS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Comments
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
INVALID ADM – Invalid ADM: ATN
communication halted.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Data link avionics were not configured correctly and therefore will not be able to
communicate with the ground network.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
The specified GDU has different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
One of the terrain or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the specified GDU is
missing or invalid.
The specified GDU’s backlight calibration cannot be found or is invalid. The system
should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
A GIA mismatch has been detected,; only one is SBAS capable.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The ADAHRS
uses GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
EIS
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MFD SOFTWARE – MFD mismatch,
communication halted.
MFD TERRAIN DSP – MFD Terrain
awareness display unavailable.
MFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION –
MFD1 calibration. Return for repair.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
LRG MAG VAR – Verify all course
angles.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
GTX1 MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
The MFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name] is
stuck.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
APPENDICES
NAV1 MANIFEST – NAV1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
Comments
The MFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature). Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. data card. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature). Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
NAV1 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
The remote NAV1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The system should be serviced.
NAV2 MANIFEST – NAV2 software
NAV2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
484
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
The PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The PFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data card is
properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
The PFD1 backlight calibration cannot be found or is invalid. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The PFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is
stuck.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 REM –
Card 1 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 REM –
Card 2 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – Card
1 is invalid.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
EIS
PFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION –
PFD1 calibration lost. Return for repair.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
navigation database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Comments
The remote NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The system should be serviced.
NON-MAGNETIC UNITS– NonNavigation angle is not set to MAGNETIC at power-up.
magnetic NAV ANGLE display units
are active.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
for navigation to [xxxx]
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint..
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
485
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
486
Message Advisory
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR – Card
2 is invalid.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD2 [key name] is
stuck.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
PFD1 TERRAIN DSP – PFD1 Terrain
awareness display unavailable.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD2 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PILOT RADIOS MUTED – Pilot
radios are muted.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
Comments
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT MAG– Select MAGNETIC NAV
ANGLE display units.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
SLCT NON-MAG– Select alternate
NAV ANGLE display units.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
SVT DISABLED – Out of available
terrain region.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB
resolution too low.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
SYSTEM CONFIG – SYSTEM config
error. Config service req’d.
Message criteria entered by the user.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to Magnetic.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to True.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
One of the terrain or obstacle databases required for TAWS in PFD1 is missing or
invalid.
The PFD2 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
The pilot radios are set on mute.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Stormscope has failed. The system should be serviced.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (4.9 arcsecond or better) is not currently installed.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
The system configuration has changed unexpectedly. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
TAWS is disabled because the audio configuration is invalid. The system should be
serviced.
TAWS is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (4.9 arc-second or
better) is not currently installed.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain Awareness audio is unavailable. The system should be serviced.
EIS
Message Advisory
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness
audio config error. Service req’d.
TERRAIN DISABLED – Terrain
Awareness DB resolution too low.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness
audio source unavailable
Excessive
Excessive track
Parallel course
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A failure has been detected in the 1090 receiver.
ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid GPS position.
Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.
The transponder is not able to receive position information.
APPENDICES
The Transponder is incapable of processing traffic information.
A failure has been detected in the UAT receiver.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XPDR1 ADS-B 1090 – Datalinik:
ADS-B 1090 receiver has failed.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – Transponder:
XPDR1 is unable to transmit ADS-B
messages.
XPDR1 ADS-B NO POS –
Transponder: ADS-B is not transmitting
position.
XPDR1 ADS-B TRFC – Transponder:
ADS-B traffic has failed
XPDR1 ADS-B UAT – Datalink:
ADS-B in UAT receiver has failed.
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
AFCS
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unsupported leg
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV – Unavailable.
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable.
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable.
selected.
VNV – Unavailable.
type in flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
vertical waypoint.
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
XPDR1 CSA FAIL - Traffic: ADS-B In
traffic alerting has failed.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR1 FAULT – Datalink: ADSB-B in
has failed.
XPDR1 FIS-B WX – Datalink: FIS-B
Weather has failed.
XPDR1 OVER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder over temp.
XPDR1 PRES ALT –Transponder:
ADS-B no pressure altitude.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 UNDER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder under temp.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
Comments
ADS-B Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is unavailable.
There is no communication with the #1 or #2 transponder.
The transponder is unable to receive ADS-B information.
The transponder is unable to receive FIS-B weather information.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
Unable to provide pressure altitude information.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an under temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
AURAL ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following aural alerts are announced by the system using a voice of female gender. If an optional terrain
system is installed, voice alerts are also generated (refer to the appropriate terrain alerts section).
Message
“Stall”
“Airspeed”
Priority
AFCS
“Minimums, minimums”
“Traffic”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Traffic, (distance, bearing, altitude)”
“TAS System Test Passed”
“TAS System Test Failed”
APPENDICES
“Vertical track”
Aircraft has descended below the preset barometric minimum descent
altitude
TIS Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the TIS system
TAS Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the optional GTS 800 TAS system.
Caution
See the Hazard Avoidance section for additional details on GTS 800 voice
alerts.
Played when the optional GTS 800 traffic system passes a pilot-initiated
self test.
Played when the optional GTS 800 traffic system fails a pilot-initiated self
Advisory test.
Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical
navigation is enabled.
Aircraft is outside TIS coverage area
Countdown timer on the PFD has reached zero
INDEX
“TIS Not Available”
“Timer Expired”
Warning
Description
Imminent stall is sensed by stall vane
Airspeed exceeds VNE
488
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
EIS
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the
system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however others
had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or
more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The
flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within
the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD
card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be
activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not
have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
PILOT PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
Description
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Profile Import/Export Results
‘No pilot profile plan files found to
import.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available pilot profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Pilot profile import failed.’
‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Pilot profile export failed.’
‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’
490
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B STATUS PAGE MESSAGES
Available to Run
Not Available
Fault
Not Configured
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
Ground Uplink Status:
Last Uplink
AWAITING DATA
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
DISABLED
---------------AVAILABLE
NOT AVAILABLE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR GRAPHICAL
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
REGIONAL NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT
ENABLED
AFCS
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
---------------Available
Not Available
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The GTX 345 is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GTX 345 is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of a number of minutes.
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather
products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No data received from the GTX 345 UAT.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system
is not receiving the FIS-B weather service.
The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Description
EIS
Status Message
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface (SURF),
Airborne Alerts (CSA)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
TERRAIN-SVT ALERTS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
AFCS
System Test Pass
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVT operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
None
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
Voice Alert
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
492
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B ALERTS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
Alert Type
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
or
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
or
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*
or
AFCS
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
APPENDICES
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’
EIS
*
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
TAWS-B Alerts Summary
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test in progress
System Test pass
None
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
EIS
No GPS position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
None
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area re-entered.
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
494
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TIS ANNUNCIATIONS
FAILED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but a failure is detected in the data
DATA FAILED
stream*
The transponder has failed*
TIS is unavailable or out of range
EIS
UNAVAILABLE
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
TIS Failure Annunciations
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS Standby
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Mode
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Failed
FAIL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS Modes
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
TRFC COAST
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
INDEX
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
APPENDICES
TRFC RMVD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AGE MM:SS
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude
trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
AFCS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
Description
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
TAS ANNUNCIATIONS
Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic System Test
Initiated
Operating
EIS
Standby
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
OPERATING
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
FAIL
Traffic System Failed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAS Failure Annunciations
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
AFCS
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
496
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B ALERTS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
ADS-B: TEST
TEST MODE
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B: SURF
None
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
ADS-B TRFC N/A
ADS-B Failed
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
ADS-B Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
Traffic Failure Annunciations
TA X.X ± XX ↕
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
APPENDICES
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA OFF SCALE
AFCS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Traffic Status Annunciations
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDL 69/69A SXM DATA LINK RECEIVER MESSAGES
Message
Message Location
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD))
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
WAITING FOR DATA...
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
weather data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
498
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
on http://fly.garmin.com.
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes;
or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to http://fly.
garmin.com and select Aviation Data Error Report.
EIS
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as database updates. Not all SD cards are compatible with the
system.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the Aux – Databases Page.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
power-up screen and the effective date on the Aux – Databases Page being displayed in amber.
LOADING UPDATED DATABASES
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
AFCS
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ system messages will be displayed until
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
database synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can
be monitored on the Aux-Database Page.
APPENDICES
All databases are updated through a single SD card in the bottom slot of the MFD. When the card is inserted,
the databases on the card will be copied to standby and synchronized across all powered, configured units.
When in standby, databases are not immediately available for use, but stored to be activated at a later time.
Databases may be loaded through Garmin Pilot and Flight Stream 510. When loading databases through
Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, the Flight Stream 510 must be enabled on the system and the multimedia
card inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
The cycles and dates for both standby and active databases are displayed on the “Aux – Databases” page on
the MFD. Any active databases with expiration dates in the past will be highlighted with amber text. When
an expired active database has a standby database that is ready to become effective, a cyan double-sided arrow
will be displayed between the database cycles. When this arrow is visible, it indicates that the standby and
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
active databases in that row will be switched on the next power cycle, activating the current standby database.
Databases can also be manually selected (or deselected) by highlighting a list item and pressing the ENT key,
provided a valid, verified standby database is present.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
EIS
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
AFCS
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ChartView database is updated on a 14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70
days of the expiration date, ChartView will no longer function. The ChartView database must be purchased
directly from Jeppesen, but can be updated at www.jeppesen.com or www.flygarmin.com.
500
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
UPDATING DATABASES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
EIS
• Supplemental SD Cards
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In order to load databases through Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, the Flight Stream 510 must be
enabled on the system and inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD. A mobile device with Garmin Pilot
must be paired with the Flight Stream 510 over Bluetooth (refer to the Additional Features section). When
there is at least one paired device available to connect, the Flight Stream 510 will automatically connect to
the system’s preferred mobile device. The preferred device can be selected on the Aux – Databases page from
a menu list of paired devices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Once a connection to the paired mobile device is made, Garmin Pilot makes available databases that
can be transferred to the Flight Stream 510. If any of these databases is more recent than the respective
standby database on the system, (or if there is no standby database on the system) those databases will be
automatically selected to load. The database updates may be initiated from the Aux - Databases page, or from
other pages on the MFD.
Updating Databases:
AFCS
1) With the system OFF, remove an SD Card from the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
2) Download and install the databases on an SD card.
3) Put the SD Card in the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the system ON.
5) Press the ENT Key or the right most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group on the MFD.
APPENDICES
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Database page group on the MFD.
8) Monitor the Sync Status on the Database page. Wait for all databases to complete syncing, indicated by ‘Sync
Complete’ being displayed. A cyan double arrow will appear between the Standby and Active columns to show
which Standby databases will be transferred to Active at the next power cycle.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
501
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-1 Database Page before Activation of Standby Databases
9) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown in the Standby Database column.
NOTE: The Restart Softkey is enabled only when the aircraft is on the ground.
10) Press the Restart Softkey. A 10 second restart countdown will appear.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
11) Press the Restart Button in the display window to continue with the restart of the system, or remove power
from the system if the Restart Softkey is diminished.
Figure B-2 Database Restart
12) Remove the SD card from the bottom slot of the MFD.
13) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
INDEX
14) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
15) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
502
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-3 Aux - Database Page - Updated Databases
16) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-4 Database Page Details
17) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
APPENDICES
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
INDEX
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
18) Remove power from the system.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
UPDATING DATABASES USING FLIGHT STREAM 510
Updating Databases from any MFD page (except the Aux - Databases page):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the Flight Stream Mutimedia Card in the bottom slot of the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the Update softkey when the Database Update screen appears.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-5 Database Update Available
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) The Flight Stream 510 will enter WI-FI mode. The following screen will appear.
Figure B-6 Starting Database Transfer
4) Put the mobile device in WI-FI mode (refer to the Additional Features section).
5) Connect the mobile device to the Flight Stream 510 WI-FI (refer to the Additional Features section). The ‘WI-FI
Not Connected’ screen will close when the WI-FI connection is established.
When the transfer is complete, the following screen will appear.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6)
Figure B-7 Database Transfer Complete
INDEX
7) Press the Close softkey.
8) When an existing database is expired and a new one is ready to become active, a ‘Database Expired’ window
will appear. Continue to the next step to restart the system.
504
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure B-8 Database Expired
EIS
NOTE: The Restart Softkey is enabled only when the aircraft is on the ground.
9) Select the Restart softkey to restart the system and load the updated database(s), or remove power from the
system if the Restart Softkey is diminished .
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
10) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
11) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
12) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-9 Database Page with Updated Databases
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
13) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
505
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
Figure B-10 Database Page Details
EIS
14) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
15) Remove power from the system.
Updating Databases from the Aux - Databases page:
1) With the system OFF, insert the Flight Stream Mutimedia Card in the bottom slot of the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Database page group on the MFD.
4) Press the Device Softkey.
AFCS
5) The Aux - Databases page will show the databases connected to the mobile device in place of the active
databases on the system. Databases selected to load will be indicated by a cyan arrow.
6) Press the Update softkey. The Flight Stream 510 will enter WI-FI mode.
7) Put the mobile device in WI-FI mode (refer to the Additional Features section).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Connect the mobile device to the Flight Stream 510 WI-FI (refer to the Additional Features section).
9) The Database Update status will appear in the Status window at the top of the page.
NOTE: The Restart Softkey is enabled only when the aircraft is on the ground.
APPENDICES
10) Select the Restart softkey to restart the system and load the updated database(s), or remove power from the
system if the Restart Softkey is diminished .
11) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
12) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
INDEX
13) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
506
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-11 Database Page with Updated Databases
14) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-12 Database Page Details
APPENDICES
15) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
INDEX
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
16) Remove power from the system.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database. At
startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by the ADAHRS. If the
system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure B-13 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure B-13, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-14. When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-14 Uploading Database
508
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN AVIATION GLOSSARY
ACARS
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Degrees Celsius
AFCS
°C
BFO
BKSP
Bluetooth
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
BOC
BOD
BRG
Both Runways
Barometric Altitude
Barometer, Barometric
Battery
Backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Beat Frequency Oscillator
Backspace
Wireless standard for data exchange over
short distances
Bottom of Climb
Bottom of Descent
see also Bearing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
B
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot Disconnect
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Auto Throttle
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Along Track
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
Average
Aviation VHF Link Control
Automated Weather Observing System
EIS
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
AT
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AVG
AVLC
AWOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airborne Communications Addressing
and Reporting System
ACC
Accuracy
ACT, ACTV
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated
Tilt
ADAHRS
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference
System
ADC
Air Data Computer
ADF
Automatic Direction Finder
ADI
Attitude Direction Indicator
ADIZ
Air Defense Identification Zone
ADS-B
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast
ADS-R
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceRebroadcast
AF
Arc to Fix Leg
AFCS
Automatic Flight Control System
AFM
Airplane Flight Manual
AFMS
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AFRM
Airframe
AGL
Above Ground Level
AHRS
Attitude and Heading Reference System
AIM
Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRB
Airborne
AIRMET
Airman’s Meteorological Information
AIRREP
Air Reports
ALRT
Alert
ALT
Altitude
ALT, ALTN
Alternator
ALTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
ALTV
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
AMPS
Amperes
ANNUNC/ANN Annunciation/Annunciator
ANT
Antenna
AOA
Angle of Attack, ACARS Over AVLC
AOC
Aeronautical Operational Control
AOG
Aircraft On Ground
AOPA
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
AP
Autopilot
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
C
CA
CAL
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CAS
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CG
CH, CHNL
CHT
CHKLIST
CI
CLD
CLR
CM
CMC
CN
CNS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
APPENDICES
Course to
Steer
INDEX
CPDLC
CPL
CR
CRG
CRNT
510
Center Runway
Course to Altitude Leg
Calibrated
Calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Crew Alerting System
Course to DME Distance Leg
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix Leg
Center of Gravity
Channel
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Course to Intercept Leg
Cloud
Clear
Centimeter
Central Maintenance Computer
Canada
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
Carbon Monoxide
Communication Radio
Configuration
Coolant
Copilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
Couple
Course to Radial Leg
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
Crosstrack
Error
CRS
CRSR
CSA
CSC
CTA
CTR
CTRL
Cumulative,
CUM
CVDR
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
see also Course, Course to Steer
Cursor
Conflict Situational Awareness
Current Speed Control
Control Area
Center
Control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
D ALT
D-ATIS
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCL
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
DEG
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
Density Altitude
Digital Automatic Terminal Info Service
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Departure Clearance
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
Degree
De-icing
Departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
DES, DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Dilution of
Precision
Cockpit Voice Data Recorder
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Control Wheel Steering
Cylinder
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Future Air Navigation System
Fixed Base Operator
Course From Fix to Distance Leg
Federal Communication Commission
Forecast
Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME
Distance Leg
Fault Detection and Exclusion
see also Fuel Flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
AFCS
FDE
FF, FFLOW
FIS-B
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-02130-00 Rev. C
°F
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FANS
FBO
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Empty, East
Engine and Airframe Systems
Engine Control Unit
Emergency Descent Mode
Expected Further Clearance
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EICAS
Engine Indication and Crew Alerting
System
EIS
Engine Indication System
ELEV
Elevation, Elevator
ELT
Emergency Locator Transmitter
EMER, EMERG, Emergency
EMERGCY
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
END, ENDUR
Endurance
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
ENG
Engine
ENGD
Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
E
EAS
ECU
EDM
EFC
Efficiency
EIS
DTK
DQR
ENR
Enroute; ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (ESA) altitude within ten miles left or right of
the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
ENT
Enter
EPE
see also Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
Error
ES
Extended Squitter
ESA
see also Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated
A measure of horizontal GPS position
Position Error error derived by satellite geometry
(EPE)
conditions and other factors.
Estimated
The estimated time at which the aircraft
Time of Arrival should reach the destination waypoint,
(ETA)
based upon current speed and track.
Estimated
The estimated time it takes to reach
Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the
(ETE)
present position, based upon current
groundspeed.
ETA
see also Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
see also Estimated Time Enroute
EVS
Enhanced Vision System
EXPIRD
Expired
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DL LTNG
DLS
DME
DN
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTG
Direction
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Datalink Lightning
Data Link System
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
see also Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
Disabled
Distance To Go, Remaining distance to
last active FPL waypoint
see also Desired Track
Data Quality Requirements
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DIR
DIS
Distance
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
FISDL
FL
FLC
FLT
FLTA
FM
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Information Service Data Link
Flight Level
Flight Level Change
Flight Timer
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Leg
FMS
Flight Management System
FOB
see also Fuel On Board
FOD
see also Fuel Over Destination
FPA
Flight Path Angle
FPL
Flight Plan
FPM
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
FREQ
Frequency
FRMT
Format
FRZ
Freezing
FSM
Flight System Messages
FSS
Flight Service Station
FT
foot/feet
Fuel Flow
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
Fuel Over
The estimated fuel remaining when the
Destination
aircraft reaches the destination waypoint,
based upon current fuel flow.
FWD
Forward
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
G/S
GA
GAL, GL
GBOX
GBT
GCU
GCS
GDC
GDL
GDR
GDU
GEA
GEO
512
Glideslope
Go-Around
Gallon(s)
Gearbox
Ground Based Transceiver
Garmin Control Unit
Ground Clutter Suppression
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Data Radio
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Geographic
GFC
GIA
GLONASS
GLS
GMA
GMC
GMT
GMU
GND
GPH
GPN
GPS
GPWS
Grid MORA
(Minimum
Off—Route
Altitude)
Groundspeed
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GSA
GSD
GSL
GSR
GSU
GTC
GTS
GTX
GWX
HA
HDG
HDOP
Heading
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite
Landing System
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Garmin Part Number
Global Positioning System
Ground Proximity Warning System
One degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the highest
elevation reference point in the grid by:
a) 1,000 feet where the highest elevation
is <5001MSL or b) 2,000 feet where the
highest elevation is >5000MSL
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
See Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed, Glideslope
Garmin Servo Adapter
Garmin Data Concentrator
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Satellite Radio
Garmin Sensor Unit
Garmin Touchscreen Controller
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
Garmin Weather Radar
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
see also Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional
gyro.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot
L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LDA
LDG
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board
Left, Left Runway
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Landing Distance Available
ETA at Final Destination
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
LGND
Legend
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LMM
Location Middle Marker
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inch
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
KEYSTK
KG
kHz
KM
KT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ITT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
Hour
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)
INFO
IN Hg
INS
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
ISA
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
Information
Inches of Mercury
Inertial Navigation System
Intersection(s)
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
International Standard Atmosphere; ISA
Relative Temperature
Inter-Turbine Temperature, Interstage
Turbine Temperature
EIS
I
IAF
IAS
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IEEE
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
IN
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
HNS
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
hPa
HPL
HR
HRZN HDG
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix
Leg
see also Horizontal Figure of Merit
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
Hybrid Navigation System
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HF
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LO
LOA
LOC
LOI
LOM
LON
LP
LPV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LRU
LT
LTNG
LVL
Low
Letter of Authorization
Localizer
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
Location Outer Marker
Longitude
Localizer Performance
Localizer Performance with Vertical
Guidance
Line Replaceable Unit
Left
Lightning
Level
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
M
Meter, Middle Marker, Mach
MMO (VMO)
Maximum Speed
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true
airspeed to the speed of sound.
MAG
Magnetic
MAG VAR
Magnetic Variation
MAHP
Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ
Manual Squelch
MANSEQ
Manual Sequence
MAP
Missed Approach Point
MASQ
Master Avionics Squelch
MAX
Maximum
MAXSPD
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
MB
Marker Beacon
MDA
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
MEPT
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
MET
Manual Electric Trim
METAR
Aviation Routine Weather Report
MFD
Multi Function Display
MFW
Multi Function Window
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MHz
Megahertz
MIC
Microphone
MIN
Minimum
514
Minimum Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (MSA) altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
MKR
Marker Beacon
MOA
Military Operations Area
MON
Monitor
MOV
Movement
MORA
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
MPEL
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
MPM
Meters per Minute
MSA
see also Minimum Safe Altitude
MSAS
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
MSG
Message
MSL
Mean Sea Level
MT, M
Meter
mV
Millivolt(s)
MVFR
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
NM
NoPT
NOTAM
NRST
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OOOI
North
Navigation
Navigation Aid
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Nautical Mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
Notice To Airman
Nearest
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Offset
Out of the gate, Off the ground, On the
ground, and In the gate
Oxygen
P ALT
PA
PASS
Pressure Altitude
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Passenger(s)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-02130-00 Rev. C
AFCS
RAM
RAT
RCVR
REF
REM
REQ
RES
SID
SIG/AIR
SIGMET
SIM
SLD
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SMS
South
Selective Availability
Search and Rescue
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Selective Calling
Sense
Surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET/AIRMET
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Supercooled Large Droplet
Slip/Skid
Symbol
Short Message System
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
Random Access Memory
Ram Air Temperature
Receiver
Reference
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
R
RA
RAD
RAD ALT
RAIM
S
SA
SAR
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL, SLCT
SELCAL
SENS
SFC
SIAP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Field Elevation Pressure
Sea Level Pressure
Quantity
RMI
RMT
RNAV
RNG
RNP
RNWY, RWY
ROL
ROM
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RVSM
RX
Reverse, Revision, Revise
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
Fix Leg
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote
Area Navigation
Range
Required Navigation Performance
Runway
Roll
Read Only Memory
Revolutions Per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Reversionary
Reduced Vertical Separation Minimums
Receive
EIS
QFE
QNH
QTY
REV
RF
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Personal Computer
Pre-Departure Clearance
Primary Flight Display
Pilot’s Guide
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
Pilot Report
Pitch
Plain Old ACARS
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Pounds per Hour
Parts per Million
Present Position
Pressure
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
Propeller
Proximity
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Parallel Track
Push-to-Talk
Power
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PC
PDC
PFD
PG
PI
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
POA
POH
POHS
POS, POSN
PPH
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
PROP
PROX
PSI
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
515
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
516
SNGL
SPC
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
SSID
STAB
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SURF
SUSP
SVT
SW
SYNC
SYN TERR
SYN VIS
SYS
Single
Space
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Service
Wireless Service Set Identifier
Stabilization
Stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
Surface
Suspend
Synthetic Vision Technology
Software
Synchronize
Synthetic Terrain
Synthetic Vision
System
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
True
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
Temporary Flight Restriction
TGT
T HDG
TIS
TIS-B
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
TOC
TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
TOLD
TOPO
TORA
TOT
TPA
Track
Track Angle
Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURB
TURN
TWIP
TX
Target
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
Turbine Inlet Temperature
see also Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
Top of Climb
Top of Descent
Take-Off, Go-Around
Takeoff and Landing Data
Topographic
Takeoff Run Available
Total
Traffic Pattern Altitude
Direction of aircraft movement relative to
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
see also Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Total
Turbulence
Procedure Turn
Terminal Weather Information for Pilots
Transmit
UAT
UHF
UNAVAIL
US
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Universal Access Transceiver
Ultra-High Frequency
Unavailable
United States
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
V
V, Vspeed
Volts
Velocity (airspeed)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOL
VOR
VORTAC
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
Yaw Damper
APPENDICES
YD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Transfer
SiriusXM Lightning
Transponder
Cross-Talk
Cross-Track, Crosstrack Error
AFCS
XFER, XFR
XM LTNG
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WOG
WOW
WPT
WT
WW
WX
Watt(s), West
Wide Area Augmentation System
Warning
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
World Geodetic System - 1984
Wireless Local Area Network based on
IEEE 802.11
Weight on Gear
Weight on Wheels
Waypoint(s)
Weight
World Wide
Weather
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
W
WAAS
WARN
WATCH
WGS-84
WI-FI, WIFI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VPROF
VR
VRP
VS
VSD
VSI
VSR, VS REQ
VTF
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Leg
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and
Tactical Air Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile
Heading Vector to Radial Leg
Visual Reporting Point
Vertical Speed
Vertical Situation Display
Vertical Speed Indicator
see also Vertical Speed Required
Vector to Final
EIS
190-02130-00 Rev. C
VM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Takeoff Decision Speed
Takeoff Safety Speed
Maneuvering Speed
Approach Climb Speed
Maximum Flap Extended Speed
Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed
Approach Speed (Flaps at x°)
Maximum Landing Gear Operating Speed
Minimum Control Speed
Maximum Operating Speed
Never-Exceed Speed
Takeoff Rotate Speed
Landing Approach Speed, Reference
Landing Speed
VSB
Maximum Speedbrake Speed
VSR
Stall Speed
VT
Takeoff Flap Retraction Speed
VTIRE
Maximum Tire Speed
VX
Best Angle of Climb Speed
VY
Best Rate of Climb Speed
VYSE
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
V DEV
Vertical Deviation
VA
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
VAC
Volts Alternating Current
VAPP
VOR Approach
VAR
Variation
VD
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
VDC
Volts Direct Current
VDL
VHF Datalink
VERT
Vertical
Vertical Figure A measure of the uncertainty in the
of Merit
aircraft’s vertical position.
Vertical Speed The vertical speed necessary to descend/
Required
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
VFOM
see also Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
V1
V2
VA
VAPP , VAC
VFE
VLE
VLNDx
VLO
VMC
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VREF
517
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
Blank Page
518
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of system operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
EIS
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa. The
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
AFCS
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
APPENDICES
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
INDEX
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.
What is GSL altitude?
EIS
GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why are there not any approaches available for a flight plan?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
system automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an
approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?
APPENDICES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The system meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 and ETSO C145
Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the approved Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
INDEX
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
520
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX D
OBS
Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
•
•
•
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
•
•
•
•
Normal (OBS not activated)
Automatic sequencing of waypoints
Manual course change on HSI not possible
Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
Must be in this mode for final approach course
When OBS mode is active, the system allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
EIS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The system suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the system from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why might the system not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and pressing the ACT Leg Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
AFCS
When does turn anticipation begin?
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
APPENDICES
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
When does the CDI scale change?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once a departure is activated, the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3 nm. The
CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm from the
departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm back
to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT Leg Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
AFCS
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘Activate Approach’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The system provides navigation along
the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
APPENDICES
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘Select Approach’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the desired
transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
522
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS.
NOTE: TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the
responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during
instrument meteorological conditions (IMC) or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft.
EIS
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information to non-TAS/TCAS-equipped aircraft.
TIS is a ground-based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C transponder
equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real-time track reports to
generate traffic notification. The system displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map Page of the MFD. TIS
information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page, as well as on the PFD Inset Map.
Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage volume. The system displays up
to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3,000 feet below, to 3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The main difference between the Traffic Information System (TIS) and Traffic Advisory (TAS) or Traffic Collision
Avoidance Systems (TCAS) is the source of surveillance data. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a halfsecond update rate, while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to
provide a five-second update rate. TIS and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system similar
to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information provided by
TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions (VMC). While TIS is a useful aid for visual traffic
avoidance, system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.
• TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
AFCS
• TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode-S radar antenna.
Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the ground-based radar
antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more
comprehensive explanation of limitations and anomalies associated with TIS.
APPENDICES
NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States. This is often the case in
mountainous regions.
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX E
WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations
is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information is then sent through the Mode
S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the surveillance information is approximately five seconds old.
TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay. These algorithms
use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of display. Occasionally,
aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on the Traffic Map Page which
affect relative bearing information and the target track vector and may delay display of the intruder information.
However, intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in spotting
traffic. The following errors are common examples:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report
incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle
(either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS may display the
intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder aircraft
course stabilizes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations
of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of the
aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and transponder
software version. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC, malfunctions should
be reported in the following ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs, General
Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)
524
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
US Highway
AVIATION SYMBOLS
Symbol
Unknown Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Item
National Highway
Large City (> 200,000)
Medium City (> 50,000)
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Small City (> 5,000)
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
EIS
State or Province Border
International Border
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Towered, Serviced Airport
Road
Restricted (Private) Airport
Railroad
Heliport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Latitude/Longitude
Intersection
River/Lake
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NDB (non-directional radio beacon)
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
VOR
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
Mode C Tower Area
User Waypoint
Interstate Highway
INDEX
State Highway
Symbol
Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Unknown Area
Danger Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
APPENDICES
LAND SYMBOLS
Item
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VRP
Symbol
AFCS
Item
Class B Airspace Altitude Label
(ceiling/floor)
Class C Airspace Altitude Label
(ceiling/floor)
Class D Airspace Altitude Label
(ceiling)
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
VOR/DME
Military Operations Area (MOA)
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX F
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This table identifies the symbols displayed in
the lower right corner of PFD or MFD maps to
indicate which hazard avoidance features are
activated for display.
Feature
Symbol
TAWS display enabled
EIS
Traffic display enabled
Feature
Air Report (AIREPs)
Turbulence (TURB)
Loss of hazard avoidance feature, (a
white X is shown over the symbol to
indicate not available; e.g., traffic)
MISCELLANEOUS
Item
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Stormscope display enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Symbol
NEXRAD display enabled
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
NEXRAD Composite (FIS-B only)
Map Pointer (when panning)
Cloud Top display enabled
Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)
Echo Top display enabled
Measuring Pointer
Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
XM Lightning display enabled
Cell Movement display enabled
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
AFCS
METARs display enabled
Overzoom Indicator
User Waypoint
City Forecast display enabled
Surface Analysis display enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Wind Vector
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
Freezing Levels display enabled
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
APPENDICES
Winds Aloft display enabled
Top of Descent (TOD)
County Warnings display enabled
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
INDEX
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) (ICNG)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
526
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC
Item
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-threat Traffic (hollow diamond)
Proximity Advisory (TAS only)
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
EIS
Traffic Advisory
Traffic Advisory (TA) arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory (PA) arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track .
Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track .
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PA or Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy is degraded. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track
ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AFCS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
APPENDICES
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
INDEX
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the
ground.
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX F
TERRAIN AVOIDANCE COLORS AND SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
EIS
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure F-1 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
AFCS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table F-1 Terrain Proximity Obstacle Symbols and Colors
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
APPENDICES
2000 ft
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
INDEX
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure F-2 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS/Terrain-SVT
528
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
EIS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table F-2 TAWS/Terrain-SVT Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table F-3 TAWS/ Terrain-SVT Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
AFCS
Potential Impact
Area Examples
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Warning
or
APPENDICES
Caution
or
Table F-4 TAWS/Terrain-SVT Potential Impact Areas with Annunciations
INDEX
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
529
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX F
Blank Page
530
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
INDEX
A
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------209
Active frequency-----------------------------------------90, 99
ADF---------------------------------------------------------108
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------- 421, 451, 500
ADF
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 108, 110
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------110
Volume-----------------------------------------------------108
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------110
ADF/DME tuning--------------------------------------------111
ADF frequency tuning--------------------------------------109
ADF volume--------------------------------------------------110
ADS-B---------------------------------------------------------393
AHRS--------------------------------------------- 478, 481, 483
AIRB----------------------------------------------------------409
Aircraft alerts------------------------------------------------475
Air Data Computer-------------------------------------------- 1
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------162
Airport Directory------------------ 421, 451, 452, 453, 500
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 179, 180, 286
Airspeed indicator---------------------------------------44, 46
Airways
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------222
Expanded--------------------------------------------------222
Alerting system----------------------------------------------471
Alerts
Aircraft-----------------------------------------------------475
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 35
Audio voice------------------------------------------ 35, 488
Levels------------------------------------------------------473
Along Track Offset------------------------------------------214
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------44, 49
Altitude
Constraints----------------------------------------- 230, 271
Altitude alerting---------------------------------------------- 69
Ammeter------------------------------------------------------ 80
Annunciations
G1000 System--------------------------------------------- 11
System-----------------------------------------------------476
Test tone---------------------------------------------- 36, 472
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------117
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------110
AOPA---------------------------------------------------------500
Approach-----------------------------------------------------520
Activating-------------------------------------------------245
Loading--------------------------------------- 206, 242, 244
Removing--------------------------------------------------245
Approach channel----------------------------------- 206, 242
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 244, 252
Arrival procedure------187, 204, 238, 240, 268, 271, 280
Attitude & Heading Reference System (AHRS)------------ 9
190-02130-00 Rev. C
Attitude indicator----------------------------------------44, 48
Audio alerting system--------------------------------------472
Audio Panel-------------------------------------------------- 2, 9
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation--------------------------124
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast--------393
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast (ADS-R)406
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)--------- 419–420
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------- 98
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------- 93
Auto-tuning, NAV------------------------------------ 102, 106
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------132
AUX - system status page--------------439, 449, 450, 452
Aviation Symbols------------------------------- 143, 144, 149
B
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 42
Barometric altimeter setting---------------------------44, 50
Basic Empty Weight----------------------------------------253
Basic Operating Weight------------------------------------253
Battery
Current------------------------------------------------------ 80
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------138
Bearing information-------------------------------------45, 57
Bearing pointer----------------------------------------------- 57
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 57
Bluetooth---------------------------------------- 194, 466, 467
C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------249
Cargo---------------------------------------------------------254
CAUTION-----------------------------------------------------473
CELL MOV Softkey------------------------------------------307
Chart options------------------------------------------------447
CHART SETUP box------------------------------------------447
ChartView----------------------------------------------------421
CLD TOP Softkey--------------------------------------------305
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------222
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------- 97
COM Frequency Box----------------------------------------- 90
Communication (COM) frequency box------------------- 44
COM Tuning Failure-----------------------------------------124
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA)--------------------407
Controls (Softkeys)-------------------------------------- 11–14
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------209
Correlation---------------------------------------------------406
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)--58–62, 241, 259, 271,
279
Changing scale-------------------------------------------522
Crew Alerting System (CAS)
Inhibits-----------------------------------------------------475
Messages------------------------------------------- 473–474
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)---------------------80, 82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
I-1
INDEX
D
F
Database(s)----------------------------------------------------- 7
Data link-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Data Link Receiver----------------------------------- 470, 498
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------469
Data logging-------------------------------------------------465
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 29
Day/Night views---------------------------------------------448
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------499
DC bus--------------------------------------------------------- 80
Dead reckoning---------------------------------------------- 72
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------- 72
DEC FUEL softkey----------------------------------------81, 82
Decision height----------------------------------------------- 70
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------- 73
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------209
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 211, 212
An entire procedure------------------------------ 211, 212
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 210, 211
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------210
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------251
Departure
Procedure------------------------------------ 202, 235, 237
Select------------------------------------235, 238, 242, 245
Time--------------------------------------------------------249
Timer-------------------------------------------------------- 39
Digital audio entertainment---------------------------------- 2
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 20
Direct-to-- 155, 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 228, 229,
269, 271, 283
Display backup-------------------------------------------- 9, 89
DME
HOLD mode-----------------------------------------------111
NAV1 mode-----------------------------------------------111
NAV2 mode-----------------------------------------------111
Tuning mode--------------------------------------- 108, 111
DME Information Window---------------------------------- 58
Field of View (SVT)------------------------------------------153
Flight ID------------------------------------------------------112
Flight Instruments----------------------------------43, 43–58
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------222
Storing-----------------------------------------------------520
Flight Plan
Active, Leg Type------------------------------------------187
Flight Plan, Active
Creating---------------------------------------------------190
Flight plan Import/Export Messages---------------------489
Flight Stream 510--------------------------- 1, 194, 466, 504
Flight timer---------------------------------------------------- 39
FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 421, 442
Cycle-------------------------------------------------------449
Expiration--------------------------------------------------449
Functions--------------------------------------------------443
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 230, 276
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------177
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------- 97
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------519
Fuel
Calculations------------------------------------------------ 81
Display------------------------------------------------------ 82
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------251
Endurance-------------------------------------------------251
Remaining-------------------------------------------------251
Required---------------------------------------------------251
Statistics---------------------------------------------------251
Fuel on Board---------------------------------- 251, 254, 255
E
ECHO TOP Softkey------------------------------------------304
Emergency Frequency--------------------------------------124
Endurance, calculated (ENDUR)-----------------------79, 81
Engine manifold pressure-------------------------------77, 79
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------112
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------122
Estimated Landing Fuel------------------------------------255
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 20
Excess Fuel Weight-----------------------------------------255
Extended Squitter-------------------------------------------393
I-2
G
Garmin Pilot-------------------------------------------------466
GDL 69/69A---------------------------------------------------- 1
GDU 1050------------------------------------------------------ 1
GEA 71---------------------------------------------------------- 1
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)--------------------- 353, 363, 371
GIA 63----------------------------------------------------------- 1
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------282
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 53
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------282
Glideslope indicator----------------------------------------- 52
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 181–286
Receiver information--------------------------------- 19–21
GMA 1347--------------------------------------------------- 1, 7
GMU 44--------------------------------------------------------- 1
Ground Based Transceiver (GBT)-------------------------393
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
INDEX
GSL----------------------------------------------------- 353, 363
GSU 75---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GTX 335R/345R Mode S Transponders--------------------- 1
H
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 44
Heading bug-------------------------------------------------- 44
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------107
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)-44, 54–56, 241, 280,
521, 522
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------- 99
HSI magenta arrow------------------------------------------ 99
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------- 99
I
IDENT function----------------------------------------------113
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------101
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------249
Initialization (system)------------------------------------------ 7
Inset map----------------------------------------------------- 45
Intercom system (ICS)--------------------------------------122
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 163–164
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------209
IOI------------------------------------------368, 378, 492, 493
K
Mode selection softkeys---------------------------- 112, 113
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------101
Motion Vectors----------------------------------------------413
Multi Function Display (MFD)-------------------------------- 2
N
National Weather Service----------------------------------319
Navigation
Database--------------------------------------------------230
Map--------------------------------------------------------184
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------- 99
Navigation (NAV) frequency box-------------------------- 44
Navigation source-------------------------------------- 59–60
Navigation status box--------------------------------------- 44
Nav radio selection------------------------------------------ 99
Nearest
Airport---------------------160, 161, 162, 177–180, 244
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------162
Airports Page-------------------------------- 160, 161, 162
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------162
VOR------------------------------------------------- 177–178
VRP-------------------------------------------------- 169, 170
Nearest airports, frequency tuning------------------------ 93
NEXRAD Softkey--------------------------------------------300
NextGen------------------------------------------------------405
No Available Charts----------------------------------------444
Normal display operation------------------------------------- 8
Key(s)------------------------------------------------------------ 5
O
L
OBS mode----------------------------------------------------- 63
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 480, 483
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 40
Oil, engine
Pressure---------------------------------------------------- 82
Temperature----------------------------------------------- 82
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 520–521
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 249, 251
Outside air temperature------------------------------------ 44
Overview-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------142
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------259
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------107
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 70
LPV----------------------------------------------------- 259, 283
M
Magnetometer------------------------------------------------- 1
Map
Panning----------------------------------------------------134
Map symbols------------------------------------------------525
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------107
Marker beacon annunciations----------------------------- 69
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 85
Measurement units, changing displayed-------------26, 34
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 23
Messages
Reminder--------------------------------------------------- 40
Minimum descent altitude---------------------------------- 70
Missed Approach----------------- 187, 246, 256, 259, 283
MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------107
Mode S-------------------------------------------------------112
190-02130-00 Rev. C
P
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 24–27
Pairing--------------------------------------------------------466
Parallel Track-------------------------------------------------215
Passenger address------------------------------------------120
Passenger(s)-------------------------------------------------254
PA system----------------------------------------------------120
Pending flight plan---------------------------- 194, 195, 196
PFD failure---------------------------------------------------124
Pilot and Stores Weight------------------------------------253
PIREP---------------------------------------------------------348
Primary Flight Display (PFD)---------------------------------- 2
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 11–13
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
I-3
INDEX
Q
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------- 92
R
Radar Altitude-----------------------------------------------407
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-20–21,
240, 256, 257, 519
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 40
Required Vertical Speed------------------------------------277
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI)--------- 277, 278
ROC----------------------------------------368, 378, 492, 493
RS-232----------------------------------------------------------- 2
RS-485----------------------------------------------------------- 2
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 91
S
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 421, 436, 439
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------440
SBAS---------------------------------------256, 257, 258, 519
Scheduler------------------------------ 40–41, 421–422, 462
Secure Digital (SD) card---------------------------------6, 499
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------154
Selected course-------------------------------------------45, 55
Selected heading-----------------------------------------45, 55
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------- 90
Sequencing waypoints
Automatic-------------------------------------------------521
SIGMET-------------------------------------------------------340
SiriusXM
Radio-------------------------------------------------------290
XM Satellite Weather------------------------------------290
NEXRAD---------------------------------------------------300
SiriusXM Radio Volume------------------------------------461
SiriusXM Weather
AIREPs-----------------------------------------------------323
AIRMETs---------------------------------------------------340
Freezing Level---------------------------------------------314
Icing--------------------------------------------------------321
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------323
SIGMETs---------------------------------------------------340
Turbulence------------------------------------------ 321, 322
Slip/Skid indicator----------------------------------------44, 48
Softkeys----------------------------------------------11–18, 44
EIS-------------------------------------------------------17, 78
LTNG-------------------------------------------------------306
PFD---------------------------------------------------------- 12
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------117
Split COM operation----------------------------------------121
SQ annunciation--------------------------------------------119
Standby frequency---------------------------------- 90, 93, 99
ADF---------------------------------------------------------108
I-4
Standby frequency field------------------------------------- 90
Standby Navigation Database----------------------------502
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------117
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------124
Sunrise--------------------------------------------------------250
Sunset--------------------------------------------------------250
SURF----------------------------------------------------------409
SUSP----------------------------------------------------------- 64
SVT------------------------------------------------------------486
SVT troubleshooting----------------------------------------468
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------525
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)----------------- 421, 422
System
Annunciations--------------------------------------- 11, 471
Message advisories--------------------------------------478
System alerting----------------------------------------------- 68
System Setup Page------------------------------------------ 28
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 36
System time--------------------------------------------------- 44
T
TA-------------------------------------------------------------488
Tachometer-----------------------------------------------77, 79
TAF------------------------------------------------------------310
TAS------------------------------------------------------------478
TAS Traffic
Non-Threat Traffic----------------------------------------393
PA----------------------------------------------------------393
Proximity Advisory---------------------------------------393
TAWS-B------------------------------------------------ 371, 493
ALERTS-----------------------------------------------------493
Temporary Flight Restrictions-----------------------------325
Terminal procedures charts--------------------------------444
Terrain--------------------------------------------------------480
Color indications-----------------------------------------528
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------353
Terrain-SVS---------------------------------------------------362
Alerts-------------------------------------------------------492
TFR------------------------------------------------------------325
Timer
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 39
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 39
Timer, PFD generic------------------------------------------- 37
TOPO DATA------------------------------------------- 141, 149
Top of Descent (TOD)-------------------------------- 276, 277
TOPO SCALE------------------------------------------ 141, 142
Track indicator------------------------------------------------ 54
Traffic
Annunciation---------------------------------------------- 45
Traffic Advisory (TA)----------------------------------------488
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B)-----------406
Traffic Information Service (TIS)-------------------- 523–524
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
INDEX
Transponder--------------------------------------------------- 15
Transponder code entry------------------------------------115
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 85
Transponder mode field------------------------------- 85, 114
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------113
Transponder status box------------------------------------- 44
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 249, 250, 251
Trip statistics--------------------------------------40, 250, 251
True Airspeed (TAS)------------------------------- 44, 46, 251
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------521
Turn rate indicator---------------------------------------44, 56
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 91
W
U
XM radio---------------------------------------------- 457, 458
XM radio active channel-----------------------------------459
XM radio channel list---------------------------------------459
XM radio presets--------------------------------------------460
XM radio service class--------------------------------------458
Unable to display chart------------------------------------444
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------440
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------224
V
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)------------ 277, 278, 283
Vertical navigation------------------------------------------230
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------229
Vertical Navigation (VNAV)-------------------------------186
Guidance--------------------------------------------------231
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)------------------- 44, 52, 278
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------116
VNV-----------------------------------------------------------276
VNV guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------228
Enabling---------------------------------------------------228
VNV indications---------------------------------------------- 67
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic--------------------------------------388
VOL annunciation-------------------------------------------119
Volume-------------------------------------------------------461
Volume level
ADF-------------------------------------------------- 108, 110
VOR, NearestSee Nearest: VOR
VOR selection------------------------------------------------- 99
VRP---------------------------------------------- 143, 169, 170
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 230, 276
190-02130-00 Rev. C
WAAS-------------------------------------------- 259, 483, 519
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------521
Skipping---------------------------------------------------521
Waypoint Selection Submenu--- 182, 190, 191, 198, 256
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 2
WiFi---------------------------------------------------- 454, 456
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 150, 151
WIND Softkey------------------------------------------------344
X
Z
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
I-5
INDEX
Blank Page
I-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-28-181 Archer
190-02130-00 Rev. C
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
www.garmin.com
Piper PA-28-181
Archer
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG)
Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical
Support: 888.606.5482
190-02130-00
Revision A
Piper PA-28-181 Archer
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising